From 825dbf927e87d453f315d93d22cb3525ff04bb3c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Kyle Isom <kyle@imap.cc>
Date: Wed, 28 Feb 2018 16:52:46 -0800
Subject: [PATCH] misc/kforth: Add forth standard 83

---
 doc/fst83/FORTH-83.PRN | 6140 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 doc/fst83/fst83-0.txt  |  265 ++
 doc/fst83/fst83-1.txt  |   93 +
 doc/fst83/fst83-10.txt |  132 +
 doc/fst83/fst83-11.txt |  264 ++
 doc/fst83/fst83-12.txt | 1188 ++++++++
 doc/fst83/fst83-13.txt |  198 ++
 doc/fst83/fst83-14.txt |  139 +
 doc/fst83/fst83-15.txt |  132 +
 doc/fst83/fst83-16.txt |  198 ++
 doc/fst83/fst83-2.txt  |   91 +
 doc/fst83/fst83-3.txt  |   91 +
 doc/fst83/fst83-4.txt  |   67 +
 doc/fst83/fst83-5.txt  |  596 ++++
 doc/fst83/fst83-6.txt  |   67 +
 doc/fst83/fst83-7.txt  |   66 +
 doc/fst83/fst83-8.txt  |  132 +
 doc/fst83/fst83-9.txt  |  199 ++
 doc/fst83/fst83-a.txt  |  198 ++
 doc/fst83/fst83-c.txt  |  594 ++++
 doc/fst83/fst83-d.txt  |  728 +++++
 doc/fst83/fst83-e.txt  |  331 +++
 doc/fst83/fst83_12.fs  |   69 +
 doc/fst83/fst83_13.fs  |   17 +
 doc/fst83/fst83_14.fs  |   13 +
 doc/fst83/fst83_15.fs  |   20 +
 doc/fst83/fst83_16.fs  |   10 +
 doc/fst83/fst83_b.fs   |   19 +
 doc/fst83/fst83_c.fs   |   11 +
 doc/fst83/fst83chk.fs  |   33 +
 doc/fst83/s.txt        |  462 +++
 31 files changed, 12563 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/FORTH-83.PRN
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-0.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-1.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-10.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-11.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-12.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-13.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-14.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-15.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-16.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-2.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-3.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-4.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-5.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-6.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-7.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-8.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-9.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-a.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-c.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-d.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83-e.txt
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83_12.fs
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83_13.fs
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83_14.fs
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83_15.fs
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83_16.fs
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83_b.fs
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83_c.fs
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/fst83chk.fs
 create mode 100644 doc/fst83/s.txt

diff --git a/doc/fst83/FORTH-83.PRN b/doc/fst83/FORTH-83.PRN
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..68dec85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/FORTH-83.PRN
@@ -0,0 +1,6140 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                  FORTH-83 STANDARD
+                                          
+                      A PUBLICATION OF THE FORTH STANDARDS TEAM
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                     AUGUST 1983
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+          FORTH-83 STANDARD
+
+
+          
+
+                       COPYRIGHT c. 1983  FORTH STANDARDS TEAM
+
+          Permission is hereby granted to reproduce this document in whole
+          or in part provided that such reproductions refer to the fact
+          that the copied material is subject to copyright by the FORTH
+          Standards Team.  No changes or modifications may be made to the
+          copied material unless it is clearly indicated that such changes
+          were not incorporated in the original copyrighted work.
+
+          The existence of a FORTH Standard does not in any respect
+          preclude anyone, whether the individual has approved this
+          Standard or not, from implementing, marketing, purchasing or
+          using products, processes, or procedures not conforming to the
+          Standard.  FORTH Standards are subject to periodic review and
+          users are cautioned to obtain the latest editions.
+
+          ISBN 0-914699-03-2
+
+          FORTH STANDARDS TEAM
+          P.O. BOX 4545
+          MOUNTAIN VIEW, CA  94040
+          USA
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         ii
+
+
+
+
+
+          FORTH-83 STANDARD
+
+
+          
+
+                                  TABLE OF CONTENTS
+
+          1.   FOREWORD  ...............................................  1
+          2.   PURPOSE  ................................................  2
+          3.   SCOPE  ..................................................  2
+          4.   TRADEOFFS  ..............................................  3
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS  ...................................  4
+          6.   REFERENCES  ............................................. 12
+          7.   REQUIREMENTS  ........................................... 13
+          8.   COMPLIANCE AND LABELING  ................................ 15
+          9.   USAGE  .................................................. 17
+          10.  ERROR CONDITIONS  ....................................... 20
+          11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION  ...................................... 22
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET  ...................................... 25
+          13.  DOUBLE NUMBER EXTENSION WORD SET  ....................... 41
+          14.  ASSEMBLER EXTENSION WORD SET  ........................... 44
+          15.  SYSTEM EXTENSION WORD SET  .............................. 46
+          16.  CONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS  ............................. 48
+          
+          APPENDICES
+               A.   FORTH STANDARDS TEAM MEMBERSHIP  ................... 51
+               B.   UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS  ...................... 54
+               C.   EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS  ............................ 60
+                    C.1  SEARCH ORDER SPECIFICATION AND CONTROL  ....... 61
+                    C.2  DEFINITION FIELD ADDRESS CONVERSION OPERATORS . 66
+               D.   STANDARDS TEAM CHARTER  ............................ 69
+               E.   PROPOSAL/COMMENT FORM AND INSTRUCTIONS  ............ 78
+          
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         iii
+
+
+
+
+
+          FORTH-83 STANDARD
+
+
+          
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         iv
+
+
+
+
+
+          1.   FOREWORD
+
+
+
+
+                                    1.   FOREWORD
+
+
+          FORTH is an integrated programming approach and computer
+          language.  FORTH was invented by Mr. Charles Moore specifically
+          to increase programmer productivity in the development of
+          computer related applications without sacrificing machine
+          efficiency.  FORTH is a layered environment containing the
+          elements of a computer language as well as those of an operating
+          system and a machine monitor.  This extensible, layered
+          environment provides for highly interactive program development
+          and testing.
+
+          In the interests of transportability of application software
+          written in FORTH, standardization efforts began in the mid-1970s
+          by the European FORTH User's Group (EFUG).  This effort resulted
+          in the FORTH-77 Standard.  As the language continued to evolve,
+          an interim FORTH-78 Standard was published by the FORTH Standards
+          Team.  Following FORTH Standards Team meetings in 1979 the FORTH-
+          79 Standard was published in 1980.
+
+          The FORTH Standards Team is comprised of individuals who have a
+          great variety of experience and technical expertise with FORTH.
+          The FORTH Standards Team consists of both users and implementers.
+          Comments, proposals, and correspondence should be mailed to:
+          FORTH Standards Team, P.O. Box 4545, Mountain View, CA 94040 USA.
+
+          FORTH's extensibility allows the language to be expanded and
+          adapted to special needs and different hardware systems.  A
+          programmer or vendor may choose to strictly adhere with the
+          standard, but the choice to deviate is acknowledged as beneficial
+          and sometimes necessary.  If the standard does not explicitly
+          specify a requirement or restriction, a system or application may
+          utilize any choice without sacrificing compliance to the standard
+          provided that the system or application remains transportable and
+          obeys the other requirements of the standard.
+
+               
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          1
+
+
+
+
+
+          2.   PURPOSE
+
+
+
+
+                                    2.   PURPOSE
+
+
+          The purpose of this standard is to allow transportability of
+          FORTH-83 Standard Programs in source form among FORTH-83 Standard
+          Systems.  A standard program shall execute equivalently on all
+          standard systems.
+
+
+
+                                     3.   SCOPE
+
+
+          This standard shall apply to any FORTH-83 Standard Program
+          executing on any FORTH-83 Standard System, provided sufficient
+          computer resources (memory, mass storage) are available.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          2
+
+
+
+
+
+          4.   TRADEOFFS
+
+
+
+
+                                   4.   TRADEOFFS
+
+
+          When conflicting choices are made, the following order guides the
+          Standards Team:
+
+          1)   Functional correctness - known bounds, non-ambiguous;
+
+          2)   Portability - repeatable results when programs are
+               transported among Standard Systems;
+
+          3)   Simplicity;
+
+          4)   Naming clarity - uniformity of expression using descriptive
+               rather than procedure names, i.e., [COMPILE] rather than 'C,
+               and ALLOT rather than DP+! ;
+
+          5)   Generality;
+
+          6)   Execution speed;
+
+          7)   Memory compactness;
+
+          8)   Compilation speed;
+
+          9)   Historical continuity;
+
+          10)  Pronounceability;
+
+          11)  Teachability.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          3
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+
+
+                              5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+          These are the definitions of the terms used within this Standard.
+
+          address, byte
+               An unsigned 16-bit number that locates an 8-bit byte in a
+               standard FORTH address space over the range {0..65,535}.  It
+               may be a native machine address or a representation on a
+               virtual machine, locating the addr-th byte within the
+               virtual byte address space.  Addresses are treated as
+               unsigned numbers.  See:  "arithmetic, two's complement"
+
+          address, compilation
+               The numerical value compiled for a FORTH word definition
+               which identifies that definition.  The address interpreter
+               uses this value to locate the machine code corresponding to
+               each definition.
+
+          address, native machine
+               The natural address representation of the host computer.
+
+          address, parameter field
+               The address of the first byte of memory associated with a
+               word definition for the storage of compilation addresses (in
+               a colon definition), numeric data, text characters, etc.
+
+          arithmetic, two's complement
+               Arithmetic is performed using two's complement integers
+               within a field of either 16 or 32 bits as indicated by the
+               operation.  Addition and subtraction of two's complement
+               integers ignore any overflow condition.  This allows numbers
+               treated as unsigned to produce the same results as if the
+               numbers had been treated as signed.
+
+          block
+               The 1024 bytes of data from mass storage which are
+               referenced by block numbers in the range {0..the number of
+               blocks available -1}.  The actual amount of data transferred
+               and the translation from block number to device and physical
+               record is a function of the implementation.  See:  "block
+               buffer"  "mass storage"
+
+          block buffer
+               A 1024-byte memory area where a block is made temporarily
+               available for use.  Block buffers are uniquely assigned to
+               blocks.  See:  "9.7 Multiprogramming Impact"
+
+          byte
+               An assembly of 8 bits.  In reference to memory, it is the
+               storage capacity for 8 bits.
+
+
+
+
+                                          4
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+          character
+               A 7-bit number the significance of which is given by the
+               ASCII standard.  When contained in a larger field, the
+               higher order bits are zero.  See:  "6. REFERENCES"
+
+          compilation
+               The action of converting text words from the input stream
+               into an internal form suitable for later execution.  When in
+               the compile state, the compilation addresses of FORTH words
+               are compiled into the dictionary for later execution by the
+               address interpreter.  Numbers are compiled to be placed on
+               the data stack when later executed.  Numbers are accepted
+               from the input stream unsigned or negatively signed and
+               converted using the value of BASE .  See:  "number"  "number
+               conversion"  "interpreter, text"
+
+          defining word
+               A word that, when executed, creates a new dictionary entry
+               in the compilation vocabulary.  The new word name is taken
+               from the input stream.  If the input stream is exhausted
+               before the new name is available, an error condition exists.
+               Example of defining words are:  :  CONSTANT  CREATE
+
+          definition
+               See:  "word definition"
+
+          dictionary
+               A structure of word definitions in computer memory which is
+               extensible and grows toward higher memory addresses.
+               Entries are organized in vocabularies to aid location by
+               name.  See:  "search order"
+
+          display
+               The process of sending one or more characters to the current
+               output device.  These characters are typically displayed or
+               printed on a terminal.  The selection of the current output
+               device is system dependent.
+
+          division, floored
+               Integer division in which the remainder carries the sign of
+               the divisor or is zero, and the quotient is rounded to its
+               arithmetic floor.  Note that, except for error conditions,
+               n1 n2 SWAP OVER /MOD ROT * + is identical to n1.  See:
+               "floor, arithmetic" 
+               Examples:
+                    dividend  divisor  remainder  quotient
+                      10        7        3          1
+                     -10        7        4         -2
+                      10       -7       -4         -2
+                     -10       -7       -3          1
+
+          equivalent execution
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          5
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               A standard program will produce the same results, exclusive
+               of timing dependencies, when given the same inputs on any
+               Standard System which has sufficient resources to execute
+               the program.  Only standard source programs are
+               transportable.
+
+          error condition
+               An exceptional condition which requires action by the system
+               which may be other than the expected function.  Refer to the
+               section "10. Error Conditions".
+
+          false
+               A zero number represents the false state of a flag.
+
+          flag
+               A number that may have one of two logical states, false or
+               true.  See:  "false"  "true"
+
+          floor, arithmetic
+               If z is any real number, then the floor of z is the greatest
+               integer less than or equal to z.
+                    The floor of +.6 is 0
+                    The floor of -.4 is -1
+
+          free field format
+               Numbers are converted using the value of BASE and then
+               displayed with no leading zeros.  A trailing space is
+               displayed.  The number of characters displayed is the
+               minimum number of characters, at least one, to uniquely
+               represent the number.  See:  "number conversion"
+
+          glossary
+               A set of explanations in natural language to describe the
+               corresponding computer execution of word definitions.
+
+          immediate word
+               A word which executes when encountered during compilation or
+               interpretation.  Immediate words handle special cases during
+               compilation.  See, for example, IF LITERAL ." etc.
+
+          input stream
+               A sequence of characters available to the system, for
+               processing by the text interpreter.  The input stream
+               conventionally may be taken from the current input device
+               (via the text input buffer) and mass storage (via a block
+               buffer).  BLK , >IN , TIB and #TIB specify the input stream.
+               Words using or altering BLK , >IN , TIB and #TIB are
+               responsible for maintaining and restoring control of the
+               input stream.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          6
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               The input stream extends from the offset value of >IN to the
+               size of the input stream.  If BLK is zero the input stream
+               is contained within the area addressed by TIB and is #TIB
+               bytes long.  If BLK is non-zero the input stream is
+               contained within the block buffer specified by BLK and is
+               1024 bytes long.   See:  "11.8 Input Text"
+
+          interpreter, address
+               The machine code instructions, routine or other facilities
+               that execute compiled word definitions containing
+               compilation addresses.
+
+          interpreter, text
+               The word definitions(s) that repeatedly accepts a word name
+               from the input stream, locates the corresponding compilation
+               address and starts the address interpreter to execute it.
+               Text from the input stream interpreted as a number leaves
+               the corresponding value on the data stack.  Numbers are
+               accepted from the input stream unsigned or negatively signed
+               and converted using the value of BASE .  See:  "number"
+               "number conversion"
+
+          layers
+               The grouping of word names of each Standard word set to show
+               like characteristics.  No implementation requirements are
+               implied by this grouping.
+
+          layer, compiler
+               Word definitions which add new procedures to the dictionary
+               or which aid compilation by adding compilation addresses or
+               data structures to the dictionary.
+
+          layer, devices
+               Word definitions which allow access to mass storage and
+               computer peripheral devices.
+
+          layer, interpreter
+               Word definitions which support vocabularies, terminal
+               output, and the interpretation of text from the text input
+               buffer or a mass storage device by executing the
+               corresponding word definitions.
+
+          layer, nucleus
+               Word definitions generally defined in machine code that
+               control the execution of the fundamental operations of a
+               virtual FORTH machine.  This includes the address
+               interpreter.
+
+          load
+               Redirection of the text interpreter's input stream to be
+               from mass storage.  This is the general method for
+               compilation of new definitions into the dictionary.
+
+          mass storage
+
+
+
+                                          7
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               Storage which might reside outside FORTH's address space.
+               Mass storage data is made available in the form of 1024-byte
+               blocks.  A block is accessible within the FORTH address
+               space in a block buffer.  When a block has been indicated as
+               UPDATEed (modified) the block will ultimately be transferred
+               to mass storage.
+
+          number
+               When values exist within a larger field, the most-
+               significant bits are zero.  16-bit numbers are represented
+               in memory by addressing the first of two bytes at
+               consecutive addresses.  The byte order is unspecified by
+               this Standard.  Double numbers are represented on the stack
+               with the most-significant 16 bits (with sign) most
+               accessible.  Double numbers are represented in memory by two
+               consecutive 16-bit numbers.  The address of the least
+               significant 16 bits is two greater than the address of the
+               most significant 16 bits.  The byte order within each 16-bit
+               field is unspecified.  See:  "arithmetic, two's complement"
+               "number types" "9.8 Numbers"  "11.7 Stack Parameters"
+
+          number conversion
+               Numbers are maintained internally in binary and represented
+               externally by using graphic characters within the ASCII
+               character set.  Conversion between the internal and external
+               forms is performed using the current value of BASE to
+               determine the digits of a number.  A digit has a value
+               ranging from zero to the value of BASE-1.  The digit with
+               the value zero is represented by the ASCII character "0"
+               (position 3/0 with the decimal equivalent of 48).  This
+               representation of digits proceeds through the ASCII
+               character set to the character "(" corresponding to the
+               decimal value 9.  For digits with a value exceeding 9, the
+               ASCII graphic characters beginning with the character "A"
+               (position 4/1 with the decimal equivalent 65) corresponding
+               to the decimal value 10 are used.  This sequence then
+               continues up to and including the digit with the decimal
+               value 71 which is represented by the ASCII character "~"
+               (position 7/14 with a decimal equivalent 126).  A negative
+               number may be represented by preceding the digits with a
+               single leading minus sign, the character "-".
+
+          number types
+               All number types consist of some number of bits.  These bits
+               are either arbitrary or are weighted.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          8
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               Signed and unsigned numbers use weighted bits.  Weighted
+               bits within a number have a value of a power of two
+               beginning with the rightmost (least-significant) bit having
+               the value of two to the zero power.  This weighting
+               continues to the leftmost bit increasing the power by one
+               for each bit.  For an unsigned number this weighting pattern
+               includes the leftmost bit; thus, for an unsigned 16-bit
+               number the weight of the leftmost bit is 32,768.  For a
+               signed number this weighting pattern includes the leftmost
+               bit but the weight of the leftmost bit is negated; thus, for
+               a signed 16-bit number the weight of the leftmost bit is
+               -32,768.  This weighting pattern for signed numbers is
+               called two's complement notation.
+
+               Unspecified weighted numbers are either unsigned numbers or
+               signed numbers; program context determines whether the
+               number is signed or unsigned.  See:  "11.7 Stack Parameters"
+
+          pictured numeric output
+               The use of numeric output definitions which convert
+               numerical values into text strings.  These definitions are
+               used in a sequence which resembles a symbolic 'picture' of
+               the desired text format.  Conversion proceeds from least-
+               significant digit to most-significant digit, and converted
+               characters are stored from higher memory addresses to lower.
+
+          program
+               A complete specification of execution to achieve a specific
+               function (application task) expressed in FORTH source code
+               form.
+
+          receive
+               The process of obtaining one character from the current
+               input device.  The selection of the current input device is
+               system dependent.
+
+          recursion
+               The process of self-reference, either directly or
+               indirectly.
+
+          return
+               The means of indicating the end of text by striking a key on
+               an input device.  The key used is system dependent.  This
+               key is typically called "RETURN", "CARRIAGE RETURN", or
+               "ENTER".
+
+          screen
+               Textual data arranged for editing.  By convention, a screen
+               consists of 16 lines (numbered 0 through 15) of 64
+               characters each.  Screens usually contain program source
+               text, but may be used to view mass storage data.  The first
+               byte of a screen occupies the first byte of a mass storage
+               block, which is the beginning point for text interpretation
+               during a load.
+
+
+
+                                          9
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+          search order
+               A specification of the order in which selected vocabularies
+               in the dictionary are searched.  Execution of a vocabulary
+               makes it the first vocabulary in the search order.  The
+               dictionary is searched whenever a word is to be located by
+               its name.  This order applies to all dictionary searches
+               unless otherwise noted.  The search order begins with the
+               last vocabulary executed and ends with FORTH , unless
+               altered in a system dependent manner.
+
+          source definition
+               Text consisting of word names suitable for compilation or
+               execution by the text interpreter.  Such text is usually
+               arranged in screens and maintained on a mass storage device.
+
+          stack, data
+               A last in, first out list consisting of 16-bit binary
+               values.  This stack is primarily used to hold intermediate
+               values during execution of word definitions.  Stack values
+               may represent numbers, characters, addresses, boolean
+               values, etc.
+
+               When the name 'stack' is used alone, it implies the data
+               stack.
+
+          stack, return
+               A last in, first out list which contains the addresses of
+               word definitions whose execution has not been completed by
+               the address interpreter.  As a word definition passes
+               control to another definition, the return point is placed on
+               the return stack.
+
+               The return stack may cautiously be used for other values.
+
+          string, counted
+               A sequence of consecutive 8-bit bytes located in memory by
+               their low memory address.  The byte at this address contains
+               a count {0..255} of the number of bytes following which are
+               part of the string.  The count does not include the count
+               byte itself.  Counted strings usually contain ASCII
+               characters.
+
+          string, text
+               A sequence of consecutive 8-bit bytes located in memory by
+               their low memory address and length in bytes.  Strings
+               usually, but not exclusively, contain ASCII characters.
+               When the term 'string' is used alone or in conjunction with
+               other words it refers to text strings.
+
+          structure, control
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         10
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               A group of FORTH words which when executed alter the
+               execution sequence.  The group starts and terminates with
+               compiler words.  Examples of control structures:  DO ...
+               LOOP  DO ... +LOOP  BEGIN ... WHILE ... REPEAT  BEGIN ...
+               UNTIL  IF ... THEN  IF ... ELSE ... THEN  See:  "9.9 Control
+               Structures"
+
+          transportability
+               This term indicates that equivalent execution results when a
+               program is executed on other than the system on which it was
+               created.  See:  "equivalent execution"
+
+          true
+               A non-zero value represents the true state of a flag.  Any
+               non-zero value will be accepted by a standard word as
+               'true'; all standard words return a 16-bit value with all
+               bits set to one when returning a 'true' flag.
+
+          user area
+               An area in memory which contains the storage for user
+               variable.
+
+          variable, user
+               A variable whose data storage area is usually located in the
+               user area.  Some system variables are maintained in the user
+               area so that the words may be re-entrant to different users.
+
+          vocabulary
+               An ordered list of word definitions.  Vocabularies are an
+               advantage in separating different word definitions that may
+               have the same name.  More than one definition with the same
+               name can exist in one vocabulary.  The latter is called a
+               redefinition.  The most recently created redefinition will
+               be found when the vocabulary is searched.
+
+          vocabulary, compilation
+               The vocabulary into which new word definitions are appended.
+
+          word
+               A sequence of characters terminated by one blank or the end
+               of the input stream.  Leading blanks are ignored.  Words are
+               usually obtained via the input stream.
+
+          word definition
+               A named FORTH execution procedure compiled into the
+               dictionary.  Its execution may be defined in terms of
+               machine code, as a sequence of compilation address, or other
+               compiled words.
+
+          word name
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         11
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               The name of a word definition.  Word names are limited to 31
+               characters and may not contain an ASCII space.  If two
+               definitions have different word names in the same vocabulary
+               they must be uniquely findable when this vocabulary is
+               searched.  See:  "vocabulary"  "9.5.3 EXPECT"
+
+          word set
+               A named group of FORTH word definitions in the Standard.
+
+          word set, assembler extension
+               Additional words which facilitate programming in the native
+               machine language of the computer which are by nature system
+               dependent.
+
+          word set, double number extension
+               Additional words which facilitate manipulation of 32-bit
+               numbers.
+
+          word set, required
+               The minimum words needed to compile and execute Standard
+               Programs.
+
+          word set, system extension
+               Additional words which facilitate the access to internal
+               system characteristics.
+
+          word, standard
+               A named FORTH procedure definition, in the Required word set
+               or any extension word sets, formally reviewed and accepted
+               by the Standards Team.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         12
+
+
+
+
+
+          6.   REFERENCES
+
+
+
+
+                                   6.   REFERENCES
+
+
+          The following document is considered to be a portion of this
+          Standard:
+
+               American National Standard Code for Information Interchange,
               ___________________________________________________________ 
+               X3.4-1977 (ASCII), American National Standards Institute,
+               1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018, USA.
+
+          The following documents are noted as pertinent to the FORTH-83
+          Standard, but are not part of this Standard.
+
+               FORTH-77, FORTH Users Group, FST-780314
+
+               FORTH-78, FORTH International Standards Team
+
+               FORTH-79, FORTH Standards Team
+
+               FORTH-83 STANDARD, Appendices, FORTH Standards Team
+
+          Webster's Collegiate Dictionary shall be used to resolve
          _______________________________                         
+          conflicts in spelling and English word usage.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         13
+
+
+
+
+
+          7.   REQUIREMENTS
+
+
+
+
+                                  7.   REQUIREMENTS
+
+
+
+          7.1  Documentation Requirements
+
+
+          7.1.1     Each Standard System shall be accompanied by a
+          statement of:
+
+          1.   System dictionary space used in bytes;
+
+          2.   Application dictionary space available in bytes;
+
+          3.   Data space in bytes;
+
+          4.   Return stack space in bytes;
+
+          5.   Mass storage block ranges used by the system;
+
+          6.   Mass storage block ranges available to applications;
+
+          7.   Operator's terminal facilities available;
+
+          8.   System action taken upon each of the general or specified
+               error conditions as identified in this standard.
+
+
+          7.1.2     Each standard program shall be accompanied by a
+          statement of the minimum requirements for:
+
+          1.   Dictionary space in bytes;
+
+          2.   Data stack space in bytes;
+
+          3.   Return stack space in bytes;
+
+          4.   Mass storage block ranges;
+
+          5.   Operator's terminal facilities
+
+
+          7.2  Testing Requirements
+
+          The following host computer configuration is specified as a
+          minimum environment for testing against this Standard.
+          Applications may require different capacities.
+
+          1.   2000 bytes of memory for application dictionary;
+
+          2.   Data stack of 64 bytes;
+
+
+
+
+                                         14
+
+
+
+
+
+          7.   REQUIREMENTS
+
+
+          3.   Return stack of 48 bytes;
+
+          4.   Mass storage capacity of 32 blocks, numbered 0 through 31;
+
+          5.   One ASCII input/output device acting as an operator's
+               terminal.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         15
+
+
+
+
+
+          8.   COMPLIANCE AND LABELING
+
+
+
+
+                            8.   COMPLIANCE AND LABELING
+
+
+          The FORTH Standards Team hereby specifies the requirements for
+          labeling of systems and applications so that the conditions for
+          program portability may be established.
+
+          A Standard System may use the specified labeling if it complies
+          with the terms of this Standard and meets the particular Word Set
+          definitions.
+
+          A Standard Program (application) may use the specified labeling
+          if it utilizes the specified Standard System according to this
+          Standard and executes equivalently on any such system.
+
+          In a system or application, a standard word may not be redefined
+          to perform a different function within the vocabulary FORTH.
+
+
+          FORTH Standard
+
+          A system may be labeled:
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard
+
+          if it includes all of the Required Word Set in either source or
+          object form and complies with the text of this Standard.  After
+          executing "FORTH-83" the dictionary must contain all of the
+          Required Word Set in the vocabulary FORTH, as specified in this
+          Standard.
+
+
+          Standard Sub-set
+
+          A system may be labeled:
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard Sub-set
+
+          if it includes a portion of the Required Word Set and complies
+          with the remaining text of this Standard.  However, no Required
+          Word may be present with a non-standard definition.
+
+
+          Standard with Extensions
+
+          A system may be labeled:
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard with <name> Standard Extension(s)
+
+          if it comprises a FORTH-83 Standard System and one or more
+          Standard Extension Word Set(s).  For example, a designation would
+          be in the form:
+
+
+
+                                         16
+
+
+
+
+
+          8.   COMPLIANCE AND LABELING
+
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard with Double-Number Standard Extension
+
+
+          Standard Program
+
+          A FORTH source program which executes equivalently on any
+          Standard System may be labeled:
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard Program
+
+          See:  "equivalent execution"  "7. REQUIREMENTS"
+
+
+          Standard Program with Environmental Dependencies
+
+          A program which is standard in all ways except for specific
+          environmentally dependent words may be labeled:
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard Program with Environmental Dependencies
+
+          if the following additional requirements are met:
+
+               1) Environmental dependencies (including hardware
+               dependencies) shall be factored into an isolated set of
+               application word definitions.
+
+               2) Each environmentally dependent word definition must be
+               fully documented, including all dependencies in a manner at
+               least as detailed as the standard words.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         17
+
+
+
+
+
+          9.   USAGE
+
+
+
+
+                                     9.   USAGE
+
+
+
+          9.1  Words Names and Word Definitions
+
+          A Standard Program may reference only the definitions of the
+          Required Word Set and Standard Extensions and definitions which
+          are subsequently defined in terms of these words.  Furthermore, A
+          Standard Program must use the standard words as required by any
+          conventions of this Standard.  Equivalent execution must result
+          from Standard Programs.
+
+          The implementation of a Standard System may use words and
+          techniques outside the scope of the Standard, provided that no
+          program running on that system is required to use words outside
+          the Standard for normal operation.
+
+          If a Standard System or Standard Program redefines Standard
+          definitions within the FORTH vocabulary, these definitions must
+          comply with the Standard.
+
+
+          9.2  Addressable Memory
+
+          The FORTH system may share the dictionary space with the user's
+          application.  The native addressing protocol of the host computer
+          is beyond the scope of this Standard.
+
+          Therefore, in a Standard Program, the user may only operate on
+          data which was stored by the application.  No exceptions!
+
+          A Standard Program may address:
+
+          1.   parameter fields of words created with CREATE , VARIABLE ,
+               and user defined words which execute CREATE ;
+
+          2.   dictionary space ALLOTted;
+
+          3.   data in a valid mass storage block buffer.   
+               See:  "9.7 Multiprogramming Impact";
+
+          4.   data area of user variables;
+
+          5.   text input buffer and PAD up to the amount specified as the
+               minimum for each area.
+
+          A Standard Program may NOT address:
+
+          1.   directly into the data or return stacks;
+
+          2.   into a definition's name field, link field, or code field;
+
+
+
+                                         18
+
+
+
+
+
+          9.   USAGE
+
+
+          3.   into a definition's parameter field if not stored by the
+               application.
+
+
+          9.3  Return Stack
+
+          A Standard Program may cautiously use the return stack with the
+          following restrictions:
+
+          The return stack may not be accessed inside a do-loop for values
+          placed on the return stack before the loop was entered.  Further,
+          neither I nor J may be used to obtain the index of a loop if
+          values are placed and remain on the return stack within the loop.
+          When the do-loop is executed all values placed on the return
+          stack within that loop must be removed before LOOP , +LOOP , or
+          LEAVE is executed.  Similarly, all values placed on the return
+          stack within a colon definition must be removed before the colon
+          definition is terminated at ; or before EXIT is executed.
+
+
+          9.4  Compilation
+
+          The system uses the return stack and the dictionary in a system
+          dependent manner during the compilation of colon definitions.
+          Some words use the data stack in a system dependent manner during
+          compilation.  See:  "sys (11.7)"
+
+
+          9.5  Terminal Input and Output
+
+
+          9.5.1     KEY
+
+          A Standard System must receive all valid ASCII characters.  Each
+          KEY receives one ASCII character, with more-significant bits
+          environmentally dependent and might be zero.  KEY must receive as
+          many bits as are obtainable.  A Standard Program without
+          environmental dependencies may only use the least significant 7-
+          bit ASCII character received by KEY .  For example:  KEY 127 AND
+
+
+          9.5.2     EXPECT
+
+          Control characters may be processed to allow system dependent
+          editing of the characters prior to receipt.  Therefore, a
+          Standard Program may not anticipated that control characters can
+          be received.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         19
+
+
+
+
+
+          9.   USAGE
+
+
+          9.5.3     EMIT
+
+          Because of the potential non-transportable action by terminal
+          devices of control characters, the use of ASCII control
+          characters is an environmental dependency.  Each EMIT deals with
+          only one ASCII character.  The ASCII character occupies the
+          least-significant 7 bits; the more-significant bits may be
+          environmentally dependent.  Using the more-significant bits when
+          other than zero is an environmentally dependent usage.  EMIT must
+          display as many bits as can be sent.
+
+
+          9.5.4     TYPE
+
+          Because of the potential non-transportable action by terminal
+          devices of control characters, the use of ASCII control
+          characters is an environmental dependency.
+
+
+          9.6  Transporting Programs Between Standard Systems
+
+          Further usage requirements are expected to be added for
+          transporting programs between Standard Systems.
+
+
+          9.7  Multiprogramming Impact
+
+          In a multiprogrammed system, Device Layer words and those words
+          which implicitly reference the Device Layer words may relinquish
+          control of the processor to other tasks.  Although there is
+          insufficient experience to specify a standard for
+          multiprogramming, historical usage dictates that a programmer be
+          aware of the potential impact with regard to resources shared
+          between tasks.  The only shared resources specified within the
+          Standard are block buffers.  Therefore the address of a block
+          buffer returned by BLOCK or BUFFER becomes invalid during and
+          after the execution of any word marked by the attribute M in the
+          glossary or any words executing them.  A block buffer is valid
+          only if its address is valid.  See:  "11.4 Attributes"
+
+
+          9.8  Numbers
+
+          Interpreted or compiled numbers are in the range
+          {-32,768..65,535}.  See:  "number conversion"
+
+
+          9.9  Control Structures
+
+          Control structures are compiled inside colon definitions.
+          Control structures can be nested but cannot overlap.  For
+          additional limitations see DO .
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         20
+
+
+
+
+
+          10.  ERROR CONDITIONS
+
+
+
+
+                                10.  ERROR CONDITIONS
+
+
+
+          10.1 Possible Actions on an Error
+
+          When an error condition occurs, a Standard System may take one or
+          more of the following actions:
+
+          1.   ignore and continue;
+
+          2.   display a message;
+
+          3.   execute a particular word;
+
+          4.   set interpret state and interpret a block;
+
+          5.   set interpret state and begin interpretation;
+
+          6.   other system dependent actions.
+
+          See:  "7.1 Documentation Requirements"
+
+
+          10.2 General Error Conditions
+
+          The following error conditions apply in many situations.  These
+          error conditions are listed below, but may occur at various times
+          and with various words.
+
+          1.   input stream exhausted before encountering a required <name>
                                                                      ____ 
+               or delimiting character;
+
+          2.   insufficient stack space or insufficient number of stack
+               entries during text interpretation or compilation;
+
+          3.   a word not found and not a valid number, during text
+               interpretation or compilation;
+
+          4.   compilation of incorrectly nested control structures;
+
+          5.   execution of words restricted to compilation only, when not
+               in the compile state and while not compiling a colon
+               definition;
+
+          6.   FORGETting within the system to a point that removes a word
+               required for correct execution;
+
+          7.   insufficient space remaining in the dictionary;
+
+          8.   a stack parameter out of range, e.g., a negative number when
+               a +n was specified in the glossary;
+
+
+
+                                         21
+
+
+
+
+
+          10.  ERROR CONDITIONS
+
+
+          9.   correct mass storage read or write was not possible.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         22
+
+
+
+
+
+          11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION
+
+
+
+
+                               11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION
+
+
+
+          11.1 Order
+
+          The glossary definitions are listed in ASCII alphabetical order.
+
+
+          11.2 Capitalization
+
+          Word names are capitalized throughout this Standard.
+
+
+          11.3 Stack Notation
+
+          The stack parameters input to and output from a definition are
+          described using the notation:
+
+               before -- after
+
+                    before    stack parameters before execution
+                    after     stack parameters after execution
+
+          In this notation, the top of the stack is to the right.  Words
+          may also be shown in context when appropriate.
+
+          Unless otherwise noted, all stack notation describes exectution
+          time.  If it applies at compile time, the line is followed by:
+          (compiling) .
+
+
+          11.4 Attributes
+
+          Capitalized symbols indicate attributes of the defined words:
+
+          C    The word may only be used during compilation of a colon
+               definition.
+
+          I    Indicates that the word is IMMEDIATE and will execute during
+               compilation, unless special action is taken.
+
+          M    This word has a potential multiprogramming impact.     
+               See:  "9.7 Multiprogramming Impact"
+
+          U    A user variable.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         23
+
+
+
+
+
+          11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION
+
+
+          11.5 Serial Numbers
+
+          When a substantive alteration to a word's definition is made or
+          when a new word is added, the serial number will be the last two
+          digits of the year of the Standard in which such change was made
+          (i.e., "83").  When such change is made within a Working Draft,
+          the number will be suffixed with the character identifying the
+          draft (i.e., "83A").
+
+
+          11.6 Pronunciation
+
+          The natural language pronunciation of word names is given in
+          double quotes (") where it differs from English pronunciation.
+
+
+          11.7 Stack Parameters
+
+          Unless otherwise stated, all references to numbers apply to 16-
+          bit signed integers.  The implied range of values is shown as
+          {from..to}.  The contents of an address is shown by double
+          braces, particularly for the contents of variables, i.e., BASE
+          {{2..72}}.
+
+          The following are the stack parameter abbreviations and types of
+          numbers used throughout the glossary.  These abbreviations may be
+          suffixed with a digit to differentiate multiple parameters of the
+          same type.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         24
+
+
+
+
+
+          11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION
+
+
+          Stack     Number                   Range in            Minimum
+          Abbrv.    Type                     Decimal             Field
+          
+          flag      boolean                  0=false, else=true  16
+          true      boolean                  -1 (as a result)    16
+          false     boolean                  0                   0
+          b         bit                      {0..1}              1
+          char      character                {0..127}            7
+          8b        8 arbitrary bits (byte)  not applicable      8
+          16b       16 arbitrary bits        not applicable      16
+          n         number (weighted bits)   {-32,768..32,767}   16
+          +n        positive number          {0..32,767}         16
+          u         unsigned number          {0..65,535}         16
+          w         unspecified weighted number
+                    (n or u)                 {-32,768..65,535}   16
+          addr      address (same as u)      {0..65,535}         16
+          32b       32 arbitrary bits        not applicable      32
+          d         double number            {-2,147,483,648..
+                                             2,147,483,647}      32
+          +d        positive double number   {0..2,147,483,647}  32
+          ud        unsigned double number   {0..4,294,967,265}  32
+          wd        unspecified weighted double
+                    number (d or ud)         {-2,147,483,648..
+                                             4,294,967,295}      32
+          sys       0, 1, or more system
+                    dependent stack entries  not applicable      na
+
+          Any other symbol refers to an arbitrary signed 16-bit integer in
+          the range {-32,768..32,767}, unless otherwise noted.
+
+          Because of the use of two's complement arithmetic, the signed 16-
+          bit number (n) -1 has the same bit representation as the unsigned
+          number (u) 65,535.  Both of these numbers are within the set of
+          unspecified weighted numbers (w).  See:  "arithmetic, two's
+          complement"  "number"  "number types"  "stack, data"
+
+
+          11.8 Input Text
+
+          <name>
           ____ 
+
+               An arbitrary FORTH word accepted from the input stream.
+               This notation refers to text from the input stream, not to
+               values on the data stack.  See:  "10.2 General Error
+               Conditions"
+
+          ccc
          ___
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         25
+
+
+
+
+
+          11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION
+
+
+               A sequence of arbitrary characters accepted from the input
+               stream until the first occurrence of the specified
+               delimiting character.  The delimiter is accepted from the
+               input stream, but is not one of the characters ccc and is
                                                              ___       
+               therefore not otherwise processed.  This notation refers to
+               text from the input stream, not to values on the data stack.
+               Unless noted otherwise, the number of characters accepted
+               may be from 0 to 255.  See:  "10.2 General Error Conditions"
+
+
+          11.9 References to other words and definitions
+
+          Glossary definitions may refer to other glossary definitions or
+          to definitions of terms.  Such references are made using the
+          expression "See:".  These references provide additional
+          information which apply as if the information is a portion of the
+          glossary entry using "See:".
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         26
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+
+
+                               12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+
+          12.1 The Required Word Set Layers
+
+          The words of the Required Word Set are grouped to show like
+          characteristics.  No implementation requirements should be
+          inferred from this grouping.
+
+
+          Nucleus layer
+
+               !  *  */  */MOD  +  +!  -  /  /MOD  0<  0=  0>  1+  1-  2+
+               2-  2/  <  =  >  >R  ?DUP  @  ABS  AND  C!  C@  CMOVE
+               CMOVE>  COUNT  D+  D<  DEPTH  DNEGATE  DROP  DUP  EXECUTE
+               EXIT  FILL  I  J  MAX  MIN  MOD  NEGATE  NOT  OR  OVER  PICK
+               R>  R@  ROLL  ROT  SWAP  U<  UM*  UM/MOD  XOR
+
+
+          Device layer
+
+               BLOCK  BUFFER  CR  EMIT  EXPECT  FLUSH  KEY  SAVE-BUFFERS
+               SPACE  SPACES  TYPE  UPDATE
+
+
+          Interpreter layer
+
+               #  #>  #S  #TIB  '  (  -TRAILING  .  .(  <#  >BODY  >IN
+               ABORT  BASE  BLK  CONVERT  DECIMAL  DEFINITIONS  FIND
+               FORGET  FORTH  FORTH-83  HERE  HOLD  LOAD  PAD  QUIT  SIGN
+               SPAN  TIB  U.  WORD
+
+
+          Compiler layer
+
+               +LOOP  ,  ."  :  ;  ABORT"  ALLOT  BEGIN  COMPILE  CONSTANT
+               CREATE  DO  DOES>  ELSE  IF  IMMEDIATE  LEAVE  LITERAL  LOOP
+               REPEAT  STATE  THEN  UNTIL  VARIABLE  VOCABULARY  WHILE  [
+               [']  [COMPILE]  ]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         27
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          
+
+
+          12.2 The Required Word Set Glossary
+
+          !            16b addr --                   79            "store"
+               16b is stored at addr.
+
+          #            +d1 -- +d2                    79            "sharp"
+               The remainder of +d1 divided by the value of BASE is
+               converted to an ASCII character and appended to the output
+               string toward lower memory addresses.  +d2 is the quotient
+               and is maintained for further processing.  Typically used
+               between <# and #> .
+
+          #>           32b -- addr +n                79    "sharp-greater"
+               Pictured numeric output conversion is ended dropping 32b.
+               addr is the address of the resulting output string.  +n is
+               the number of characters in the output string.  addr and +n
+               together are suitable for TYPE .
+
+          #S           +d -- 0 0                     29          "sharp-s"
+               +d is converted appending each resultant character into the
+               pictured numeric output string until the quotient (see: # )
+               is zero.  A single zero is added to the output string if the
+               number was initially zero.  Typically used between <# and
+               #> .
+
+          #TIB         -- addr                       U,83   "number-t-i-b"
+               The address of a variable containing the number of bytes in
+               the text input buffer.  #TIB is accessed by WORD when BLK is
+               zero.  {{0..capacity of TIB}}  See:  "input stream"
+
+          '            -- addr                       M,83           "tick"
+               Used in the form:
+                       ' <name>
                          ____ 
+               addr is the compilation address of <name>.  An error
                                                   ____            
+               condition exists if <name> is not found in the currently
                                    ____                               
+               active search order.
+
+          (            --                            I,M,83        "paren"
+                       --   (compiling)
+               Used in the form:
+                       ( ccc)
                         ___ 
+               The characters ccc, delimited by ) (closing parenthesis),
                              ___                                       
+               are considered comments.  Comments are not otherwise
+               processed.  The blank following ( is not part of ccc.  ( may
                                                                ___        
+               be freely used while interpreting or compiling.  The number
+               of characters in ccc may be zero to the number of characters
                                ___                                        
+               remaining in the input stream up to the closing parenthesis.
+
+          *            w1 w2 -- w3                   79            "times"
+               w3 is the least-significant 16 bits of the arithmetic
+               product of w1 times w2.
+
+
+
+                                         28
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          */           n1 n2 n3 -- n4                83     "times-divide"
+               n1 is first multiplied by n2 producing an intermediate 32-
+               bit result.  n4 is the floor of the quotient of the
+               intermediate 32-bit result divided by the divisor n3.  The
+               product of n1 times n2 is maintained as an intermediate 32-
+               bit result for greater precision than the otherwise
+               equivalent sequence: n1 n2 * n3 / .  An error condition
+               results if the divisor is zero or if the quotient falls
+               outside of the range {-32,768..32,767}.  See:  "division,
+               floored"
+
+          */MOD        n1 n2 n3 -- n4 n5             83 "times-divide-mod"
+               n1 is first multiplied by n2 producing an intermediate 32-
+               bit result.  n4 is the remainder and n5 is the floor of the
+               quotient of the intermediate 32-bit result divided by the
+               divisor n3.  A 32-bit intermediate product is used as for
+               */ .  n4 has the same sign as n3 or is zero.  An error
+               condition results if the divisor is zero or if the quotient
+               falls outside of the range {-32,768..32,767}.  See:
+               "division, floored"
+
+          +            w1 w2 -- w3                   79             "plus"
+               w3 is the arithmetic sum of w1 plus w2.
+
+          +!           w1 addr --                    79       "plus-store"
+               w1 is added to the w value at addr using the convention for
+               + .  This sum replaces the original value at addr.
+
+          +LOOP        n --                          C,I,83    "plus-loop"
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               n is added to the loop index.  If the new index was
+               incremented across the boundary between limit-1 and limit
+               then the loop is terminated and loop control parameters are
+               discarded.  When the loop is not terminated, execution
+               continues to just after the corresponding DO .  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding DO .  See:  DO
+
+          ,            16b --                        79            "comma"
+               ALLOT space for 16b then store 16b at HERE 2- .
+
+          -            w1 w2 -- w3                   79            "minus"
+               w3 is the result of subtracting w2 from w1.
+
+          -TRAILING    addr +n1 -- addr +n2          79    "dash-trailing"
+               The character count +n1 of a text string beginning at addr
+               is adjusted to exclude trailing spaces.  If +n1 is zero,
+               then +n2 is also zero.  If the entire string consists of
+               spaces, then +n2 is zero.
+
+          .            n --                          M,79            "dot"
+               The absolute value of n is displayed in a free field format
+               with a leading minus sign if n is negative.
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         29
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          ."           --                            C,I,83    "dot-quote"
+                       --   (compiling)              
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       ." ccc"                       
                          ___                        
+               Later execution will display the characters ccc up to but
                                                           ___          
+               not including the delimiting " (close-quote).  The blank
+               following ." is not part of ccc.
                                           ___ 
+
+          .(           --                            I,M,83    "dos-paren"
+                       --                            (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       .( ccc)                       
                          ___                        
+               The characters ccc up to but not including the delimiting )
                              ___                                         
+               (closing parenthesis) are displayed.  The blank following .(
+               is not part of ccc.
                              ___ 
+
+          /            n1 n2 -- n3                   83           "divide"
+               n3 is the floor of the quotient of n1 divided by the divisor
+               n2.  An error condition results if the divisor is zero or if
+               the quotient falls outside of the range {-32,768..32,767}.
+               See:  "division, floored"
+
+          /MOD         n1 n2 -- n3 n4                83       "divide-mod"
+               n3 is the remainder and n4 the floor of the quotient of n1
+               divided by the divisor n2.  n3 has the same sign as n2 or is
+               zero.  An error condition results if the divisor is zero or
+               if the quotient falls outside of the range
+               {-32,768..32,767}.  See:  "division, floored"
+
+          0<           n -- flag                     83        "zero-less"
+               flag is true if n is less than zero (negative).
+
+          0=           w -- flag                     83      "zero-equals"
+               flag is true if w is zero.
+
+          0>           n -- flag                     83     "zero-greater"
+               flag is true if n is greater than zero.
+
+          1+           w1 -- w2                      79         "one-plus"
+               w2 is the result of adding one to w1 according to the
+               operations of + .
+
+          1-           w1 -- w2                      79        "one-minus"
+               w2 is the result of subtracting one from w1 according to the
+               operation of - .
+
+          2+           w1 -- w2                      79         "two-plus"
+               w2 is the result of adding two to w1 according to the
+               operation of + .
+
+          2-           w1 -- w2                      79        "two-minus"
+               w2 is the result of subtracting two from w1 according to the
+               operation of - .
+
+
+
+
+                                         30
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          2/           n1 -- n2                      83       "two-divide"
+               n2 is the result of arithmetically shifting n1 right one
+               bit.  The sign is included in the shift and remains
+               unchanged.
+
+          :            -- sys                        M,79          "colon"
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       : <name> ... ;                
                          ____                       
+               Create a word definition for <name> in the compilation
                                             ____                    
+               vocabulary and set compilation state.  The search order is
+               changed so that the first vocabulary in the search order is
+               changed so that the first vocabulary in the search order is
+               replaced by the compilation vocabulary.  The compilation
+               vocabulary is unchanged.  The text from the input stream is
+               subsequently compiled.  <name> is called a "colon
                                        ____                    
+               definition".  The newly created word definition for <name>
                                                                    ____ 
+               cannot be found in the dictionary until the corresponding ;
+               or ;CODE is successfully processed.   
+               
+               An error condition exists if a word is not found and cannot
+               be converted to a number or if, during compilation from mass
+               storage, the input stream is exhausted before encountering ;
+               or ;CODE .  sys is balanced with its corresponding ; .  See:
+               "compilation"  "9.4 Compilation"
+
+          ;            --                            C,I,79   "semi-colon"
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               Stops compilation of a colon definition, allows the <name>
                                                                    ____ 
+               of this colon definition to be found in the dictionary, sets
+               interpret state and compiles EXIT (or a system dependent
+               word which performs an equivalent function).  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding : .  See:  EXIT  :  "stack,
+               return"  "9.4 Compilation"
+
+          <            n1 n2 -- flag                 83        "less-than"
+               flag is true if n1 is less than n2.   
+                       -32678 32767 < must return true.                   
+                       -32768 0 < must return true.
+
+          <#           --                            79       "less-sharp"
+               Initialize pictured numeric output conversion.  The words: 
+                       #  #>  #S  <#  HOLD  SIGN     
+               can be used to specify the conversion of a double number
+               into an ASCII text string stored in right-to-left order.
+
+          =            w1 w2 -- flag                 83           "equals"
+               flag is true if w1 is equal to w2.
+
+          >            n1 n2 -- flag                 83     "greater-than"
+               flag is true if n1 is greater than n2.                     
+                       -32768 32767 > must return false.                  
+                       -32768 0 > must return false.
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         31
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          >BODY        addr1 -- addr2                83          "to-body"
+               addr2 is the parameter field address corresponding to the
+               compilation address addr1.  See:  "9.2 Addressable Memory"
+
+          >IN          -- addr                       U,79          "to-in"
+               The address of a variable which contains the present
+               character offset within the input stream {{0..the number of
+               characters in the input stream}}.  See:  WORD
+
+          >R           16b --                        C,79           "to-r"
+               Transfers 16b to the return stack.  See  "9.3 Return Stack"
+
+          ?DUP         16b -- 16b 16b                79    "question-dupe"
+               or      0 -- 0                        
+               Duplicate 16b if it is non-zero.
+
+          @            addr -- 16b                   79            "fetch"
+               16b is the value at addr.
+
+          ABORT                                      79                   
+               Clears the data stack and performs the function of QUIT .
+               No message is displayed.
+
+          ABORT"       flag --                       C,I,83  "abort-quote"
+                       --   (compiling)              
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       flag ABORT" ccc"              
                                   ___               
+               When later executed, if flag is true the characters ccc,
                                                                   ___ 
+               delimited by " (close-quote), are displayed and then a
+               system dependent error abort sequence, including the
+               function of ABORT , is performed.  If flag is false, the
+               flag is dropped and execution continues.  The blank
+               following ABORT" is not part of ccc.
                                               ___ 
+
+          ABS          n -- u                        79         "absolute"
+               u is the absolute value of n.  If n is -32,768 then u is the
+               same value.  See:  "arithmetic, two's complement"
+
+          ALLOT        w --                          79
+               Allocates w bytes in the dictionary.  The address of the
+               next available dictionary entry is updated accordingly.
+
+          AND          16b1 16b2 -- 16b3             79                   
+               16b3 is the bit-by-bit logical 'and' of 16b1 with 16b2.
+
+          BASE         -- addr                       U,83                 
+               The address of a variable containing the current numeric
+               conversion radix.  {{2..72}}
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         32
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          BEGIN        --                            C,I,79               
+                       -- sys   (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       BEGIN ... flag UNTIL          
+               or      
+                       BEGIN ... flag WHILE ... REPEAT                    
+               BEGIN marks the start of a word sequence for repetitive
+               execution.  A BEGIN-UNTIL loop will be repeated until flag
+               is true.  A BEGIN-WHILE-REPEAT will be repeated until flag
+               is false.  The words after UNTIL or REPEAT will be executed
+               when either loop is finished.  sys is balanced with its
+               corresponding UNTIL or WHILE .  See:  "9.9 Control
+               Structures"
+
+          BLK          -- addr                       U,79          "b-l-k"
+               The address of a variable containing the number of the mass
+               storage block being interpreted as the input stream.  If the
+               value of BLK is zero the input stream is taken from the text
+               input buffer.  {{0..the number of blocks available -1}}
+               See:  TIB  "input stream"
+
+          BLOCK        u -- addr                     M,83                 
+               addr is the address of the assigned buffer of the first byte
+               of block u.  If the block occupying that buffer is not block
+               u and has been UPDATEed it is transferred to mass storage
+               before assigning the buffer.  If block u is not already in
+               memory, it is transferred from mass storage into an assigned
+               block buffer.  A block may not be assigned to more than one
+               buffer.  If u is not an available block number, an error
+               condition exists.  Only data within the last buffer
+               referenced by BLOCK or BUFFER is valid.  The contents of a
+               block buffer must not be changed unless the change may be
+               transferred to mass storage.
+
+          BUFFER       u -- addr                     M,83                 
+               Assigns a block buffer to block u.  addr is the address of
+               the first byte of the block within its buffer.  This
+               function is fully specified by the definition for BLOCK
+               except that if the block is not already in memory it might
+               not be transferred from mass storage.  The contents of the
+               block buffer assigned to block u by BUFFER are unspecified.
+
+          C!           16b addr --                   79          "c-store"
+               The least-significant 8 bits of 16b are stored into the byte
+               at addr.
+
+          C@           addr -- 8b                    79          "c-fetch"
+               8b is the contents of the byte at addr.
+
+          CMOVE        addr1 addr2 u --              83           "c-move"
+               Move u bytes beginning at address addr1 to addr2.  The byte
+               at addr1 is moved first, proceeding toward high memory.  If
+               u is zero nothing is moved.
+
+
+
+
+                                         33
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          CMOVE>       addr1 addr2 u --              83        "c-move-up"
+               Move the u bytes at address addr1 to addr2.  The move begins
+               by moving the byte at (addr1 plus u minus 1) to (addr2 plus
+               u minus 1) and proceeds to successively lower addresses for
+               u bytes.  If u is zero nothing is moved.  (Useful for
+               sliding a string towards higher addresses).
+
+          COMPILE      --                            C,83                 
+               Typically used in the form:           
+                       : <name> ... COMPILE <namex> ... ;                 
+               When <name> is executed, the compilation address compiled
+               for <namex> is compiled and not executed.  <name> is
+               typically immediate and <namex> is typically not immediate.
+               See:  "compilation"
+
+          CONSTANT     16b --                        M,83                 
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       16b CONSTANT <name>           
                                     ____            
+               Creates a dictionary entry for <name> so that when <name> is
                                               ____                ____    
+               later executed, 16b will be left on the stack.
+
+          CONVERT      +d1 addr1 -- +d2 addr2        79                   
+               +d2 is the result of converting the characters within the
+               text beginning at addr1+2 into digits, using the value of
+               BASE , and accumulating each into +d1 after multiplying +d1
+               by the value of BASE .  Conversion continues until an
+               unconvertible character is encounter.  addr2 is the location
+               of the first unconvertible character.
+
+          COUNT        addr1 -- addr2 +n             79                   
+               addr2 is addr1+1 and +n is the length of the counted string
+               at addr1.  The byte at addr1 contains the byte count +n.
+               Range of +n is {0.255}  See:  "string, counted"
+
+          CR           --                            M,79            "c-r"
+               Displays a carriage-return and line-feed or equivalent
+               operation.
+
+          CREATE       --                            M,79                 
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       CREATE <name>                 
                               ____                  
+               Creates a dictionary entry for <name>.  After <name> is
                                               ____           ____    
+               created, the next available dictionary location is the first
+               byte of <name>'s parameter field.  When <name> is
                        ____                            ____    
+               subsequently executed, the address of the first byte of
+               <name>'s parameter field is left on the stack.  CREATE does
                ____                                                      
+               not allocate space in <name>'s parameter field.
                                      ____                    
+
+          D+           wd1 wd2 -- wd3                79           "d-plus"
+               wd3 is the arithmetic sum of wd1 plus wd2.
+
+          D<           d1 d2 -- flag                 83      "d-less-than"
+               flag is true if d1 is less than d2 according to the
+               operation of < except extended to 32 bits.
+
+
+
+                                         34
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          DECIMAL      --                            79                   
+               Set the input-output numeric conversion base to ten.
+
+          DEFINITIONS  --                            79                   
+               The compilation vocabulary is changed to be the same as the
+               first vocabulary in the search order.  See:  "vocabulary,
+               compilation"
+
+          DEPTH        -- +n                         79                   
+               +n is the number of 16-bit values contained in the data
+               stack before +n was placed on the stack.
+
+          DNEGATE      d1 -- d2                      79         "d-negate"
+               d2 is the two's complement of d1.
+
+          DO           w1 w2 --                      C,I,83               
+                       -- sys   (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       DO ... LOOP                   
+               or      
+                       DO ... +LOOP                  
+               Begins a loop which terminates based on control parameters.
+               The loop index begins at w2, and terminates based on the
+               limit w1.  See LOOP and +LOOP for details on how the loop is
+               terminated.  The loop is always executed at least once.  For
+               example: w DUP DO ... LOOP executes 65,536 times.  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding LOOP or +LOOP .  See:  "9.9
+               Control Structures"
+               
+               An error condition exists if insufficient space is available
+               for at least three nesting levels.
+
+          DOES>        -- addr                       C,I,83         "does"
+                       --   (compiling)              
+               Defines the execution-time action of a word created by a
+               high-level defining word.  Used in the form:               
+                       : <namex> ... <create> ... DOES> ... ;             
+               and then                              
+                       <namex> <name>                
                                ____                 
+               where <create> is CREATE or any user defined word which
+               executes CREATE .                     
+               
+               Marks the termination of the defining part of the defining
+               word <namex> and then begins the definition of the
+               execution-time action for words that will later be defined
+               by <namex>.  When <name> is later executed, the address of
                                  ____                                   
+               <name>'s parameter field is placed on the stack and then the
                ____                                                       
+               sequence of words between DOES> and ; are executed.
+
+          DROP         16b --                        79                   
+               16b is removed from the stack.
+
+          DUP          16b -- 16b 16b                79             "dupe"
+               Duplicate 16b.
+
+
+
+                                         35
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          ELSE         --                            C,I,79               
+                       sys1 -- sys2   (compiling)    
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       flag IF ... ELSE ... THEN     
+               ELSE executes after the true part following IF .  ELSE
+               forces execution to continue at just after THEN .  sys1 is
+               balanced with its corresponding IF .  sys2 is balanced with
+               its corresponding THEN .  See:  IF  THEN
+
+          EMIT         16b --                        M,83                 
+               The least-significant 7-bit ASCII character is displayed.
+               SEE:  "9.5.3 EMIT"
+
+          EXECUTE      addr --                       79
+               The word definition indicated by addr is executed.  An error
+               condition exists if addr is not a compilation address
+
+          EXIT         --                            C,79                 
+               Compiled within a colon definition such that when executed,
+               that colon definition returns control to the definition that
+               passed control to it by returning control to the return
+               point on the top of the return stack.  An error condition
+               exists if the top of the return stack does not contain a
+               valid return point.  May not be used within a do-loop.  See:
+               ;  "stack, return"  "9.3 Return Stack"
+
+          EXPECT       addr +n --                    M,83                 
+               Receive characters and store each into memory.  The transfer
+               begins at addr proceeding towards higher addresses one byte
+               per character until either a "return" is received or until
+               +n characters have been transferred.  No more than +n
+               characters will be stored.  The "return" is not stored into
+               memory.  No characters are received or transferred if +n is
+               zero.  All characters actually received and stored into
+               memory will be displayed, with the "return" displaying as a
+               space.  See:  SPAN  "9.5.2 EXPECT"
+
+          FILL         addr u 8b --                  83                   
+               u bytes of memory beginning at addr are set to 8b.  No
+               action is taken if u is zero.
+
+          FIND         addr1 -- addr2 n              83                   
+               addr1 is the address of a counted string.  The string
+               contains a word name to be located in the currently active
+               search order.  If the word is not found, addr2 is the string
+               address addr1, and n is zero.  If the word is found, addr2
+               is the compilation address and n is set to one of two non-
+               zero values.  If the word found has the immediate attribute,
+               n is set to one.  If the word is non-immediate, n is set to
+               minus one (true).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         36
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          FLUSH        --                            M,83                 
+               Performs the function of SAVE-BUFFERS then unassigns all
+               block buffers.  (This may be useful for mounting or changing
+               mass storage media).
+
+          FORGET       --                            M,83                 
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       FORGET <name>                 
                               ____                  
+               If <name> is found in the compilation vocabulary, delete
                   ____                                                
+               <name> from the dictionary and all words added to the
                ____                                                
+               dictionary after <name> regardless of their vocabulary.
                                 ____                                 
+               Failure to find <name> is an error condition.  An error
                                ____                                  
+               condition also exists if the compilation vocabulary is
+               deleted.  See:  "10.2 General Error Conditions"
+
+          FORTH        --                            83                   
+               The name of the primary vocabulary.  Execution replaces the
+               first vocabulary in the search order with FORTH .  FORTH is
+               initially the compilation vocabulary and the first
+               vocabulary in the search order.  New definitions become part
+               of the FORTH vocabulary until a different compilation
+               vocabulary is established.  See:  VOCABULARY
+
+          FORTH-83     --                            83                   
+               Assures that a FORTH-83 Standard System is available,
+               otherwise an error condition exists.
+
+          HERE         -- addr                       79
+               The address of the next available dictionary location.
+
+          HOLD         char --                       79
+               char is inserted into a pictured numeric output string.
+               Typically used between <# and #>.
+
+          I            -- w                          C,79                 
+               w is a copy of the loop index.  May only be used in the
+               form:   
+                       DO ... I ... LOOP             
+               or      
+                       DO ... I ... +LOOP
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         37
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          IF           flag --                       C,I,79               
+                       -- sys   (compiling)
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       flag IF ... ELSE ... THEN     
+               or      
+                       flag IF ... THEN              
+               If flag is true, the words following IF are executed and the
+               words following ELSE until just after THEN are skipped.  The
+               ELSE part is optional.                
+               
+               If flag is false, the words from IF through ELSE , or from
+               IF through THEN (when no ELSE is used), are skipped.  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding ELSE or THEN .  See:  "9.9
+               Control Structures"
+
+          IMMEDIATE    --                            79                   
+               Marks the most recently created dictionary entry as a word
+               which will be executed when encountered during compilation
+               rather than compiled.
+
+          J            -- w                          C,79                 
+               w is a copy of the index of the next outer loop.  May only
+               be used within a nested DO-LOOP or DO-+LOOP in the form, for
+               example:                              
+                       DO ... DO ... J ... LOOP ... +LOOP
+
+          KEY          -- 16b                        M,83                 
+               The least-significant 7 bits of 16b is the next ASCII
+               character received.  All valid ASCII characters can be
+               received.  Control characters are not processed by the
+               system for any editing purpose.  Characters received by KEY
+               will not be displayed.  See:  "9.5.1 KEY"
+
+          LEAVE        --                            C,I,83               
+                       --   (compiling)              
+               Transfers execution to just beyond the next LOOP or +LOOP .
+               The loop is terminated and loop control parameters are
+               discarded.  May only be used in the form:                  
+                       DO ... LEAVE ... LOOP         
+               or      
+                       DO ... LEAVE ... +LOOP        
+               LEAVE may appear within other control structures which are
+               nested within the do-loop structure.  More than one LEAVE
+               may appear within a do-loop.  See:  "9.3 Return Stack"
+
+          LITERAL      -- 16b                        C,I,79               
+                       16b --   (compiling)          
+               Typically used in the form:           
+                       [ 16b ] LITERAL               
+               Compiles a system dependent operation so that when later
+               executed, 16b will be left on the stack.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         38
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          LOAD         u --                          M,79                 
+               The contents of >IN and BLK , which locate the current input
+               stream, are saved.  The input stream is then redirected to
+               the beginning of screen u by setting >IN to zero and BLK to
+               u.  The screen is then interpreted.  If interpretation from
+               screen u is not terminated explicitly it will be terminated
+               when the input stream is exhausted and then the contents of
+               >IN and BLK will be restored.  An error condition exists if
+               u is zero.  See:  >IN  BLK  BLOCK
+
+          LOOP         --                            C,I,83               
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               Increments the DO-LOOP index by one.  If the new index was
+               incremented across the boundary between limit-1 and limit
+               the loop is terminated and loop control parameters are
+               discarded.  When the loop is not terminated, execution
+               continues to just after the corresponding DO .  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding DO .  See:  DO
+
+          MAX          n1 n2 -- n3                   79              "max"
+               n3 is the greater of n1 and n2 according to the operation of
+               > .
+
+          MIN          n1 n2 -- n3                   79              "min"
+               n3 is the lesser of n1 and n2 according to the operation of
+               < .
+
+          MOD          n1 n2 -- n3                   83                   
+               n3 is the remainder after dividing n1 by the divisor n2.  n3
+               has the same sign as n2 or is zero.  An error condition
+               results if the divisor is zero or if the quotient falls
+               outside of the range {-32,768..32,767}.  See:  "division,
+               floored"
+
+          NEGATE       n1 -- n2                      79                   
+               n2 is the two's complement of n1, i.e, the difference of
+               zero less n1.
+
+          NOT          16b1 -- 16b2                  83                   
+               16b2 is the one's complement of 16b1.
+
+          OR           16b1 16b2 -- 16b3             79                   
+               16b3 is the bit-by-bit inclusive-or of 16b1 with 16b2.
+
+          OVER         16b1 16b2 -- 16b1 16b2 16b3   79                   
+               16b3 is a copy of 16b1.
+
+          PAD          -- addr                       83                   
+               The lower address of a scratch area used to hold data for
+               intermediate processing.  The address or contents of PAD may
+               change and the data lost if the address of the next
+               available dictionary location is changed.  The minimum
+               capacity of PAD is 84 characters.
+
+
+
+
+                                         39
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          PICK         +n -- 16b                     83                   
+               16b is a copy of the +nth stack value, not counting +n
+               itself.  {0..the number of elements on stack-1}            
+                       0 PICK is equivalent to DUP   
+                       1 PICK is equivalent to OVER
+
+          QUIT         --                            79                   
+               Clears the return stack, sets interpret state, accepts new
+               input from the current input device, and begins text
+               interpretation.  No message is displayed.
+
+          R>           -- 16b                        C,79         "r-from"
+               16b is removed from the return stack and transferred to the
+               data stack.  See:  "9.3 Return Stack"
+
+          R@           -- 16b                        C,79        "r-fetch"
+               16b is a copy of the top of the return stack.
+
+          REPEAT       --                            C,I,79               
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       BEGIN ... flag WHILE ... REPEAT                    
+               At execution time, REPEAT continues execution to just after
+               the corresponding BEGIN .  sys is balanced with its
+               corresponding WHILE .  See:  BEGIN
+
+          ROLL         +n --                         83                   
+               The +nth stack value, not counting +n itself is first
+               removed and then transferred to the top of the stack, moving
+               the remaining values into the vacated position.  {0..the
+               number of elements on the stack-1}    
+                       2 ROLL is equivalent to ROT   
+                       0 ROLL is a null operation
+
+          ROT          16b1 16b2 16b3 -- 16b2 16b3 16b1  79         "rote"
+               The top three stack entries are rotated, bringing the
+               deepest to the top.
+
+          SAVE-BUFFERS --                            M,79   "save-buffers"
+               The contents of all block buffers marked as UPDATEed are
+               written to their corresponding mass storage blocks.  All
+               buffers are marked as no longer being modified, but may
+               remain assigned.
+
+          SIGN         n --                          83                   
+               If n is negative, an ASCII "-" (minus sign) is appended to
+               the pictured numeric output string.  Typically used between
+               <# and #> .
+
+          SPACE        --                            M,79                 
+               Displays an ASCII space.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         40
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          SPACES       +n --                         M,79                 
+               Displays +n ASCII spaces.  Nothing is displayed if +n is
+               zero.
+
+          SPAN         -- addr                       U,83                 
+               The address of a variable containing the count of characters
+               actually received and stored by the last execution of
+               EXPECT .  See:  EXPECT
+
+          STATE        -- addr                       U,79                 
+               The address of a variable containing the compilation state.
+               A non-zero content indicates compilation is occurring, but
+               the value itself is system dependent.  A Standard Program
+               may not modify this variable.
+
+          SWAP         16b1 16b2 -- 16b2 16b1        79                   
+               The top two stack entries are exchanged.
+
+          THEN         --                            C,I,79               
+                       sys --   (compiling)
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       flag IF ... ELSE ... THEN     
+               or      
+                       flag IF ... THEN              
+               THEN is the point where execution continues after ELSE , or
+               IF when no ELSE is present.  sys is balanced with its
+               corresponding IF or ELSE .  See:  IF  ELSE
+
+          TIB          -- addr                       83            "t-i-b"
+               The address of the text input buffer.  This buffer is used
+               to hold characters when the input stream is coming from the
+               current input device.  The minimum capacity of TIB is 80
+               characters.
+
+          TYPE         addr +n --                    M,79                 
+               +n characters are displayed from memory beginning with the
+               character at addr and continuing through consecutive
+               addresses.  Nothing is displayed if +n is zero.  See:
+               "9.5.4 TYPE"
+
+          U.           u --                          M,79          "u-dot"
+               u is displayed as an unsigned number in a free-field format.
+
+          U<           u1 u2 -- flag                 83      "u-less-than"
+               flag is true if u1 is less than u2.
+
+          UM*          u1 u2 -- ud                   83        "u-m-times"
+               ud is the unsigned product of u1 times u2.  All values and
+               arithmetic are unsigned.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         41
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          UM/MOD       ud u1 -- u2 u3                83   "u-m-divide-mod"
+               u2 is the remainder and u3 is the floor of the quotient
+               after dividing ud by the divisor u1.  All values and
+               arithmetic are unsigned.  An error condition results if the
+               divisor is zero or if the quotient lies outside the range
+               {0..65,535}.  See:  "floor, arithmetic"
+
+          UNTIL        flag --                       C,I,79               
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       BEGIN ... flag UNTIL          
+               Marks the end of a BEGIN-UNTIL loop which will terminate
+               based on flag.  If flag is true, the loop is terminated.  If
+               flag is false, execution continues to just after the
+               corresponding BEGIN .  sys is balanced with its
+               corresponding BEGIN .  See:  BEGIN
+
+          UPDATE       --                            79                   
+               The currently valid block buffer is marked as modified.
+               Blocks marked as modified will subsequently be automatically
+               transferred to mass storage should its memory buffer be
+               needed for storage of a different block or upon execution of
+               FLUSH or SAVE-BUFFERS .
+
+          VARIABLE     --                            M,79                 
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       VARIABLE <name>               
                                 ____                
+               A dictionary entry for <name> is created and two bytes are
                                       ____                              
+               ALLOTted in its parameter field.  This parameter field is to
+               be used for contents of the variable.  The application is
+               responsible for initializing the contents of the variable
+               which it creates.  When <name> is later executed, the
                                        ____                        
+               address of its parameter field is placed on the stack.
+
+          VOCABULARY   --                            M,83                 
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       VOCABULARY <name>             
                                   ____              
+               A dictionary entry for <name> is created which specifies a
                                       ____                              
+               new ordered list of word definitions.  Subsequent execution
+               of <name> replaces the first vocabulary in the search order
                   ____                                                   
+               with <name>.  When <name> becomes the compilation vocabulary
                     ____          ____                                    
+               new definitions will be appended to <name>'s list.     See:
                                                    ____                  
+               DEFINITIONS  "search order"
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         42
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          WHILE        flag --                       C,I,79               
+                       sys1 -- sys2   (compiling)    
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       BEGIN ... flag WHILE ... REPEAT                    
+               Selects conditional execution based on flag.  When flag is
+               true, execution continues to just after the WHILE through to
+               the REPEAT which then continues execution back to just after
+               the BEGIN .  When flag is false, execution continues to just
+               after the REPEAT , exiting the control structure.  sys1 is
+               balanced with its corresponding BEGIN .  sys2 is balanced
+               with its corresponding REPEAT .  See:  BEGIN
+
+          WORD         char -- addr                  M,83                 
+               Generates a counted string by non-destructively accepting
+               characters from the input stream until the delimiting
+               character char is encountered or the input stream is
+               exhausted.  Leading delimiters are ignored.  The entire
+               character string is stored in memory beginning at addr as a
+               sequence of bytes.  The string is followed by a blank which
+               is not included in the count.  The first byte of the string
+               is the number of characters {0..255}.  If the string is
+               longer than 255 characters, the count is unspecified.  If
+               the input stream is already exhausted as WORD is called,
+               then a zero length character string will result.           
+               
+               If the delimiter is not found the value of >IN is the size
+               of the input stream.  If the delimiter is found >IN is
+               adjusted to indicate the offset to the character following
+               the delimiter.  #TIB is unmodified.   
+               
+               The counted string returned by WORD may reside in the "free"
+               dictionary area at HERE or above.  Note that the text
+               interpreter may also use this area.  See:  "input stream"
+
+          XOR          16b1 16b2 -- 16b3             79             "x-or"
+               16b3 is the bit-by-bit exclusive-or of 16b1 with 16b2.
+
+          [            --                            I,79   "left-bracket"
+                       --   (compiling)              
+               Sets interpret state.  The text from the input stream is
+               subsequently interpreted.  For typical usage see LITERAL .
+               See:  ]
+
+          [']          -- addr                       C,I,M,83    "bracket-
+                       --   (compiling)                              tick"
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       ['] <name>                    
                            ____                     
+               Compiles the compilation address addr of <name> as a
                                                         ____      
+               literal.  When the colon definition is later executed addr
+               is left on the stack.  An error condition exists if <name>
                                                                    ____ 
+               is not found in the currently active search order.  See:
+               LITERAL
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         43
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          [COMPILE]    --                            C,I,M,79    "bracket-
+                       --   (compiling)                           compile"
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       [COMPILE] <name>              
                                  ____               
+               Forces compilation of the following word <name>.  This
                                                         ____        
+               allows compilation of an immediate word when it would
+               otherwise have been executed.
+
+          ]            --                            79    "right-bracket"
+               Sets compilation state.  The text from the input stream is
+               subsequently compiled.  For typical usage see LITERAL .
+               See:  [
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         44
+
+
+
+
+
+          13.  DOUBLE NUMBER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+
+                        13.  DOUBLE NUMBER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+          13.1 The Double Number Extension Word Set Layers
+
+
+          Nucleus layer
+
+               2!  2@  2DROP  2DUP  2OVER  2ROT  2SWAP  D+  D-  D0=  D2/
+               D<  D=  DABS  DMAX  DMIN  DNEGATE  DU<
+
+
+          Device layer
+
+               none
+
+
+          Interpreter layer
+
+               D.  D.R
+
+
+          Compiler layer
+
+               2CONSTANT  2VARIABLE
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         45
+
+
+
+
+
+          13.  DOUBLE NUMBER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+          
+
+
+          13.2 The Double Number Extension Word Set Glossary
+
+          2!           32b addr --                   79        "two-store"
+               32b is stored at addr.  See:  "number"
+
+          2@           addr -- 32b                   79        "two-fetch"
+               32b is the value at addr.  See:  "number"
+
+          2CONSTANT    32b --                        M,83   "two-constant"
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       32b 2CONSTANT <name>          
                                      ____           
+               Creates a dictionary entry for <name> so that when <name> is
                                               ____                ____    
+               later executed, 32b will be left on the stack.
+
+          2DROP        32b --                        79         "two-drop"
+               32b is removed from the stack.
+
+          2DUP         32b -- 32b 32b                79         "two-dupe"
+               Duplicate 32b.
+
+          2OVER        32b1 32b2 -- 32b1 32b2 32b3   79         "two-over"
+               32b3 is a copy of 32b1.
+
+          2ROT         32b1 32b2 32b3 -- 32b2 32b3 32b1  79     "two-rote"
+               The top three double numbers on the stack are rotated,
+               bringing the third double number number to the top of the
+               stack.
+
+          2SWAP        32b1 32b2 -- 32b2 32b1        79         "two-swap"
+               The top two double numbers are exchanged.
+
+          2VARIABLE    --                            M,79   "two-variable"
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       2VARIABLE <name>              
                                  ____               
+               A dictionary entry for <name> is created and four bytes are
                                       ____                               
+               ALLOTted in its parameter field.  This parameter field is to
+               be used for contents of the variable.  The application is
+               responsible for initializing the contents of the variable
+               which it creates.  When <name> is later executed, the
                                        ____                        
+               address of its parameter field is placed on the stack.  See:
+               VARIABLE
+
+          D+           wd1 wd2 -- wd3                79                   
+               See the complete definition in the Required Word Set.
+
+          D-           wd1 wd2 -- wd3                79          "d-minus"
+               wd3 is the result of subtracting wd2 from wd1.
+
+          D.           d --                          M,79          "d-dot"
+               The absolute value of d is displayed in a free field format.
+               A leading negative sign is displayed if d is negative.
+
+
+
+                                         46
+
+
+
+
+
+          13.  DOUBLE NUMBER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+          D.R          d +n --                       M,83        "d-dot-r"
+               d is converted using the value of BASE and then displayed
+               right aligned in a field +n characters wide.  A leading
+               minus sign is displayed if d is negative.  If the number of
+               characters required to display d is greater than +n, an
+               error condition exists.  See:  "number conversion"
+
+          D0=          wd -- flag                    83    "d-zero-equals"
+               flag is true if wd is zero.
+
+          D2/          d1 -- d2                      83     "d-two-divide"
+               d2 is the result of d1 arithmetically shifted right one bit.
+               The sign is included in the shift and remains unchanged.
+
+          D<           d1 d2 -- flag                 83                   
+               See the complete definition in the Required Word Set.
+
+          D=           wd1 wd2 -- flag               83          "d-equal"
+               flag is true if wd1 equals wd2.
+
+          DABS         d -- ud                       79       "d-absolute"
+               ud is the absolute value of d.  If d is -2,147,483,648 then
+               ud is the same value.  See:  "arithmetic, two's complement"
+
+          DMAX         d1 d2 -- d3                   79            "d-max"
+               d3 is the greater of d1 and d2.
+
+          DMIN         d1 d2 -- d3                   79            "d-min"
+               d3 is the lesser of d1 and d2.
+
+          DNEGATE      d1 -- d2                      79                   
+               See the complete definition in the Required Word Set.
+
+          DU<          ud1 ud2 -- flag               83         "d-u-less"
+               flag is true if ud1 is less than ud2.  Both numbers are
+               unsigned.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         47
+
+
+
+
+
+          14.  ASSEMBLER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+
+                          14.  ASSEMBLER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+          14.1 The Assembler Extension Word Set Layers
+
+
+          Nucleus layer
+
+               none
+
+
+          Device layer
+
+               none
+
+
+          Interpreter layer
+
+               ASSEMBLER
+
+
+          Compiler layer
+
+               ;CODE  CODE  END-CODE
+
+
+          14.2 Assembler Extension Word Set Usage
+
+          Because of the system dependent nature of machine language
+          programming, a Standard Program cannot use CODE or ;CODE .
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         48
+
+
+
+
+
+          14.  ASSEMBLER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+          
+
+
+          14.3 The Assembler Extension Word Set Glossary
+
+          ;CODE        --                            C,I,79   "semi-colon-
+                       sys1 -- sys2                  (compiling)     code"
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       : <namex> ... <create> ... ;CODE ... END-CODE      
                          _____       ______                              
+               Stops compilation, terminates the defining word <namex> and
                                                                _____     
+               executes ASSEMBLER.  When <namex> is executed in the form: 
                                          _____                           
+                       <namex> <name>                
                        _____   ____                 
+               to define the new <name>, the execution address of <name>
                                  ____                             ____ 
+               will contain the address of the code sequence following the
+               ;CODE in <namex>.  Execution of any <name> will cause this
                         _____                      ____                 
+               machine code sequence to be executed.  sys1 is balanced with
+               its corresponding : .  sys2 is balanced with its
+               corresponding END-CODE .  See:  CODE  DOES>
+
+          ASSEMBLER    --                            83                   
+               Execution replaces the first vocabulary in the search order
+               with the ASSEMBLER vocabulary.  See:  VOCABULARY
+
+          CODE         -- sys                        M,83                 
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       CODE <name> ... END-CODE      
                             ____                    
+               Creates a dictionary entry for <name> to be defined by a
                                               ____                    
+               following sequence of assembly language words.  Words thus
+               defined are called code definitions.  This newly created
+               word definition for <name> cannot be found in the dictionary
                                    ____                                   
+               until the corresponding END-CODE is successfully processed
+               (see:  END-CODE ).  Executes ASSEMBLER .  sys is balanced
+               with its corresponding END-CODE .
+
+          END-CODE     sys --                        79         "end-code"
+               Terminates a code definition and allows the <name> of the
                                                            ____        
+               corresponding code definition to be found in the dictionary.
+               sys is balanced with its corresponding CODE or ;CODE .  See:
+               CODE
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         49
+
+
+
+
+
+          15.  THE SYSTEM EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+
+                         15.  THE SYSTEM EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+          15.1 The System Extension Word Set Layers
+
+
+          Nucleus layer
+
+               BRANCH  ?BRANCH
+
+
+          Device layer
+
+               none
+
+
+          Interpreter layer
+
+               CONTEXT  CURRENT
+
+
+          Compiler layer
+
+               <MARK  <RESOLVE  >MARK  >RESOLVE
+
+
+          15.2 System Extension Word Set Usage
+
+          After BRANCH or ?BRANCH is compiled, >MARK or <RESOLVE is
+          executed.  The addr left by >MARK is passed to >RESOLVE .  The
+          addr left by <MARK is passed to <RESOLVE .  For example:    
+               : IF     COMPILE ?BRANCH  >MARK  ; IMMEDIATE 
+               : THEN   >RESOLVE  ; IMMEDIATE
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         50
+
+
+
+
+
+          15.  THE SYSTEM EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+          
+
+
+          15.3 The System Extension Word Set Glossary
+
+          <MARK        -- addr                       C,83  "backward-mark"
+               Used at the destination of a backward branch.  addr is
+               typically only used by <RESOLVE to compile a branch address.
+
+          <RESOLVE     addr --                       C,83"backward-resolve"
+               Used at the source of a backward branch after either BRANCH
+               or ?BRANCH .  Compiles a branch address using addr as the
+               destination address.
+
+          >MARK        -- addr                       C,83   "forward-mark"
+               Used at the source of a forward branch.  Typically used
+               after either BRANCH or ?BRANCH .  Compiles space in the
+               dictionary for a branch address which will later be resolved
+               by >RESOLVE .
+
+          >RESOLVE     addr --                       C,83"forward-resolve"
+               Used at the destination of a forward branch.  Calculates the
+               branch address (to the current location in the dictionary)
+               using addr and places this branch address into the space
+               left by >MARK .
+
+          ?BRANCH      flag --                       C,83"question-branch"
+               When used in the form:  COMPILE ?BRANCH  a conditional
+               branch operation is compiled.  See BRANCH for further
+               details.  When executed, if flag is false the branch is
+               performed as with BRANCH .  When flag is true execution
+               continues at the compilation address immediately following
+               the branch address.
+
+          BRANCH       --                            C,83                 
+               When used in the form:  COMPILE BRANCH  an unconditional
+               branch operation is compiled.  A branch address must be
+               compiled immediately following this compilation address.
+               The branch address is typically generated by following
+               BRANCH with <RESOLVE or >MARK .
+
+          CONTEXT      -- addr                       U,79                 
+               The address of a variable which determines the dictionary
+               search order.
+
+          CURRENT      -- addr                       U,79                 
+               The address of a variable specifying the vocabulary in which
+               new word definitions are appended.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         51
+
+
+
+
+
+          16.  CONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+
+
+                           16.  CONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          The Controlled Reference Words are word definitions which,
+          although not required, cannot be present with a non-standard
+          definition in the vocabulary FORTH of a Standard System.  These
+          words have present usage and/or are candidates for future
+          standardization.
+
+          -->          --                            I,M,79   "next-block"
+                       --                            (compilation)        
+               Continue interpretation on the next sequential block.  May
+               be used within a colon definition that crosses a block
+               boundary.
+
+          .R           n +n --                       M,83          "dot-r"
+               n is converted using BASE and then displayed right aligned
+               in a field +n characters wide.  A leading minus sign is
+               displayed if n is negative.  If the number of characters
+               required to display n is greater than +n, an error condition
+               exists.  See:  "number conversion"
+
+          2*           w1 -- w2                      83        "two-times"
+               w2 is the result of shifting w1 left one bit.  A zero is
+               shifted into the vacated bit position.
+
+          BL           -- 32                         79              "b-l"
+               Leave the ASCII character value for space (decimal 32).
+
+          BLANK        addr u --                     83                   
+               u bytes of memory beginning at addr are set to the ASCII
+               character value for space.  No action is taken if u is zero.
+
+          C,           16b --                        83          "c-comma"
+               ALLOT one byte then store the least-significant 8 bits of
+               16b at HERE 1- .
+
+          DUMP         addr u --                     M,79                 
+               List the contents of u addresses starting at addr.  Each
+               line of values may be preceded by the address of the first
+               value.
+
+          EDITOR       --                            83                   
+               Execution replaces the first vocabulary in the search order
+               with the EDITOR vocabulary.  See:  VOCABULARY
+
+          EMPTY-BUFFERS --                           M,79  "empty-buffers"
+               Unassign all block buffers.  UPDATEed blocks are not written
+               to mass storage.  See:  BLOCK
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         52
+
+
+
+
+
+          16.  CONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          END          flag --                       C,I,79               
+                       sys --                        (compiling)          
+               A synonym for UNTIL .
+
+          ERASE        addr u --                     79
+               u bytes of memory beginning at addr are set to zero.  No
+               action is taken if u is zero.
+
+          HEX          --                            29
+               Set the numeric input-output conversion base to sixteen.
+
+          INTERPRET    --                            M,83                 
+               Begin text interpretation at the character indexed by the
+               contents of >IN relative to the block number contained in
+               BLK , continuing until the input stream is exhausted.  If
+               BLK contains zero, interpret characters from the text input
+               buffer.  See:  "input stream"
+
+          K            -- w                          C,83                 
+               w is a copy of the index of the second outer loop.  May only
+               be used within a nested DO-LOOP or DO-+LOOP in the form, for
+               example:                              
+                       DO ... DO ... DO ... K ... LOOP ... +LOOP ... LOOP
+
+          LIST         u --                          M,79                 
+               The contents of screen u are displayed.  SCR is set to u.
+               See:  BLOCK
+
+          OCTAL        --                            83                   
+               Set the numeric input-output conversion base to eight.
+
+          OFFSET       -- addr                       U,83                 
+               The address of a variable that contains the offset added to
+               the block number on the stack by BLOCK or BUFFER to
+               determine the actual physical block number.
+
+          QUERY        --                            M,83                 
+               Characters are received and transferred into the memory area
+               addressed by TIB .  The transfer terminates when either a
+               "return" is received or the number of characters transferred
+               reaches the size of the area addressed by TIB .  The values
+               of >IN and BLK are set to zero and the value of #TIB is set
+               to the value of SPAN .  WORD may be used to accept text from
+               this buffer.  See:  EXPECT  "input stream"
+
+          RECURSE      --                            C,I,83               
+                       --                            (compiling)          
+               Compile the compilation address of the definition being
+               compiled to cause the definition to later be executed
+               recursively.
+
+          SCR          -- addr                       U,79          "s-c-r"
+               The address of a variable containing the number of the
+               screen most recently LISTed.
+
+
+
+                                         53
+
+
+
+
+
+          16.  CONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          SP@          -- addr                       79        "s-p-fetch"
+               addr is the address of the top of the stack just before SP@
+               was executed.
+
+          THRU         u1 u2 --                      M,83                 
+               Load consecutively the blocks from u1 through u2.
+
+          U.R          u +n --                       M,83        "u-dot-r"
+               u is converted using the value of BASE and then displayed as
+               an unsigned number right aligned in a field +n characters
+               wide.  If the number of characters required to display u is
+               greater than +n, an error condition exists.  See:  "number
+               conversion"
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         54
+
+
+
+
+
+          A.  STANDARDS TEAM MEMBERSHIP
+
+
+
+
+                       APPENDIX A.  STANDARDS TEAM MEMBERSHIP
+
+
+
+          A.1  Standard Team Membership:  Members
+
+          The following is a list in alphabetical order of the people who
+          are FORTH Standards Team Members.  These names are provided to
+          indicate the texture and make-up of the team itself.  Where
+          appropriate, the official capacity of individuals is also
+          indicated.
+
+               Paul Bartholdi, Sauverny, Switzerland
+               Robert Berkey, Palo Alto, California USA          Treasurer
+               David Boulton, Redwood City, California USA
+               John Bumgarner, Morgan Hill, California USA
+               Don Colburn, Rockville, Maryland USA
+               James T. Currie, Jr., Blacksburg, Virginia USA
+               Thomas B. Dowling, Lowell, Massachusetts USA
+               William S. Emery, Malibu, California USA
+               Lawrence P. Forsley, Rochester, New York USA
+               Kim R. Harris, Palo Alto, California USA          Referee
+               John S. James, Los Gatos, California USA
+               Guy M. Kelly, La Jolla, California USA            Chair
+               Thea Martin, Rochester, New York USA
+               Michael McNeil, Scotts Valley, California USA
+               Robert E. Patten, Modesto, California USA
+               Michael Perry, Berkeley, California USA
+               David C. Petty, Cambridge, Massachusetts USA
+               William F. Ragsdale, Hayward, California USA
+               Elizabeth D. Rather, Hermosa Beach, California USA
+               Dean Sanderson, Hermosa Beach, California USA     Referee
+               Klaus Schleisiek, Hamburg, W-Germany
+               George W. Shaw II, Hayward, California USA        Referee
+               Robert L. Smith, Palo Alto, California USA        Secretary
+               Michael K. Starling, Elkview, West Virginia USA
+               John K. Stevenson, Portland, Oregon USA
+               Glenn S. Tenney, San Mateo, California USA        Referee
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         55
+
+
+
+
+
+          A.  STANDARDS TEAM MEMBERSHIP
+
+
+          
+
+
+          A.2  FORTH Standards Team Sponsors
+
+          The following is a list in alphabetical order of individuals and
+          organizations who have contributed funds and other assistance to
+          aid the word of the FST and deserve recognition for their
+          involvement.  FST sponsors have no duties or responsibilities in
+          the FST, but they receive copies of proposals and comments
+          considered at a formal meeting, and drafts and adopted standards
+          prepared as a result of that meeting.
+
+          Creative Solutions Inc., 4801 Randolph Rd., Rockville, MD 20852
+          USA
+
+          Fantasia Systems Inc., 1059 Alameda de las Pulgas, Belmont, CA
+          94002  USA
+
+          FORTH, Inc., 2309 Pacific Coast Highway, Hermosa Beach, CA 90254
+          USA
+
+          FORTH Interest Group Inc., P.O. Box 1105, San Carlos, CA 94070
+          USA
+
+          Forthright Enterprises, P.O. Box 50911, Palo Alto, CA 94020  USA
+
+          Glen Haydon Enterprises, Box 439 Rt. 2, La Honda, CA 94020  USA
+
+          John K. Gotwals, W. Lafayette, IN  USA
+
+          John D. Hall, Oakland, CA  USA
+
+          Hartronix, Inc., 1201 N. Stadem, Tempe, AZ  85281  USA
+
+          Hewlett-Packard Corvallis Div., 1000 NE Circle Blvd., Corvallis,
+          OR  97330  USA
+
+          Information Unlimited Software, Inc., 2401 Marinship, Sausalito,
+          CA 94965  USA
+
+          Henry H. Laxen, 1259 Cornell Avenue, Berkeley, CA 94705  USA
+
+          Laxen & Harris, Inc.
+
+          George B. Lyons, 280 Henderson Street, Jersey Cit, NJ 07302  USA
+
+          C. Kevin McCabe, Chicago, IL  USA
+
+          MicroMotion, 12077 Wilshire Blvd #506, Los Angeles, CA 90025  USA
+
+          Bruce R. Montague, Monterey, CA  USA
+
+          Mountain View Press, P.O. Box 4659, Mountain View, CA 94040  USA
+
+
+
+                                         56
+
+
+
+
+
+          A.  STANDARDS TEAM MEMBERSHIP
+
+
+          Michael A. Perry, Berkeley, CA  USA
+
+          Robert Berkey Services, 2334 Dumbarton Ave., Palo Alto, CA 94303
+          USA
+
+          Royal Greenwich Observatory, Herstmonsioux Castle, Eastbourne,
+          England
+
+          Shaw Laboratories, Ltd., 24301 Southland Drive #216, Hayward, CA
+          94545  USA
+
+          Sygnetron Protection Systems, Inc., 2103 Greenspring, Timonium,
+          MD 21093  USA
+
+          Telelogic Inc., 196 Broadway, Cambridge, MA 02139  USA
+
+          UNISOFT, P.O. Box 2644, New Carrollton, MD 20784  USA
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         57
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+
+
+                      APPENDIX B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          The Uncontrolled Reference Word Set contains glossary definitions
+          which are included for public reference of words that have past
+          or present usage and/or are candidates for future
+          standardization.  No recommendation is made that these words be
+          included in a system.
+
+          No restrictions are placed on the definition or usage of
+          uncontrolled words.  However, use of these names for procedures
+          differing from the given definitions is discouraged.
+
+          !BITS        16b1 addr 16b2 --                      "store-bits"
+               Store the value of 16b1 masked by 16b2 into the equivalent
+               masked part of the contents of addr, without affecting bits
+               outside the mask.
+
+          **           n1 n2 -- n3                                 "power"
+               n3 is the value of n1 to the power n2.
+
+          +BLOCK       w -- u                                 "plus-block"
+               u is the sum of w plus the number of the block being
+               interpreted.
+
+          -'           -- addr false                           "dash-tick"
+                       -- true                       
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       -' <name>                     
                           ____                      
+               Leave the parameter field of <name> beneath zero (false) if
                                             ____                         
+               <name> can be found in the search order; leave only true if
                ____                                                      
+               not found.
+
+          -MATCH       addr1 +n1 addr2 +n2 -- addr3 flag      "dash-match"
+               Attempt to find the +n2-length text string beginning at
+               addr2 somewhere in the +n1-length text string beginning at
+               addr1.  Return the last+1 address addr3 of the match point
+               and a flag which is zero if a match exists.
+
+          -TEXT        addr1 +n1 addr2 -- n2                   "dash-text"
+               Compare two strings over the length +n1 beginning at addr1
+               and addr2.  Return zero if the strings are equal.  If
+               unequal, return n2, the difference between the last
+               characters compared:  addr1(i) - addr2(i).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         58
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          /LOOP        +n --                         C,I         "up-loop"
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               A do-loop terminating word.  The loop index is incremented
+               by the positive value +n.  If the unsigned magnitude of the
+               resultant index is greater than the limit, then the loop is
+               terminated, otherwise execution returns to the corresponding
+               DO .  The comparison is unsigned magnitude.  sys is balanced
+               with its corresponding DO .  See:  DO
+
+          1+!          addr --                            "one-plus-store"
+               Add one to the 16-bit contents at addr.
+
+          1-!          addr --                           "one-minus-store"
+               Subtract one from the 16-bit contents at addr.
+
+          ;:           -- addr                       C,I"semi-colon-colon"
+               Used to specify a new defining word:  
+                       : <namex> <name>              
                                  ____               
+               When <namex> is executed, it creates an entry for the new
+               word <name>.  Later execution of <name> will execute the
                     ____                        ____                  
+               sequence of words between ;: and ; , with the address of the
+               first (if any) parameters associated with <name> on the
                                                          ____        
+               stack.
+
+          ;S           --                            Interpret only"semi-s"
+               Stop interpretation of a block.
+
+          <>           w1 w2 -- flag                           "not-equal"
+               flag is true if w1 is not equal to w2.
+
+          <BUILDS      --                                         "builds"
+               Used in conjunction with DOES> in defining words, in the
+               form:   
+                       : <namex> ... <BUILDS ... DOES> ... ;              
+               and then:                             
+                       <namex> <name>                
                                ____                 
+               
+               When <namex> executes, <BUILDS creates a dictionary entry
+               for the new <name>.  The sequence of words between <BUILDS
                            ____                                         
+               and DOES> established a parameter field for <name>.  When
                                                            ____        
+               <name> is later executed, the sequence of words following
                ____                                                    
+               DOES> will be executed, with the parameter field address of
+               <name> on the data stack.
                ____                    
+
+          <CMOVE       addr1 addr2 u --                   "reverse-c-move"
+               A synonym for CMOVE> .
+
+          ><           16b1 -- 16b2                            "byte-swap"
+               Swap the high and low bytes within 16b1.
+
+          >MOVE<       addr1 addr2 u --                   "byte-swap-move"
+               Move u bytes beginning at addr1 to the memory beginning at
+               addr2.  During this move, the order of each byte pair is
+               reversed.
+
+
+
+                                         59
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          @BITS        addr 16b1 -- 16b2                      "fetch-bits"
+               Return the 16-bits at addr masked by 16b1.
+
+          AGAIN        --                            C,I                  
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               Effect an unconditional jump back to the start of a BEGIN-
+               AGAIN loop.  sys is balanced with its corresponding BEGIN .
+               See:  BEGIN
+
+          ASCII        -- char                       I,M          "as-key"
+                       --                            (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       ASCII ccc                     
                             ___                     
+               where the delimiter of ccc is a space.  char is the ASCII
                                      ___                               
+               character value of the first character in ccc.  If
                                                         ___     
+               interpreting, char is left on the stack.  If compiling,
+               compile char as a literal so that when the colon definition
+               is later executed, char is left on the stack.
+
+          ASHIFT       16b1 n -- 16b2                            "a-shift"
+               Shift the value 16b1 arithmetically n bits left if n is
+               positive, shifting zeros into the least significant bit
+               positions.  If n is negative, 16b1 is shifted right; the
+               sign is included in the shift and remains unchanged.
+
+          B/BUF        -- 1024                          "bytes-per-buffer"
+               A constant leaving 1024, the number of bytes per block
+               buffer.
+
+          BELL         --                            
+               Activate a terminal bell or noise-maker as appropriate to
+               the device in use.
+
+          CHAIN        --                            M                    
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       CHAIN <name>                  
                              ____                   
+               Connect the CURRENT vocabulary to all definitions that might
+               be entered into the vocabulary <name> in the future.  The
                                               ____                     
+               CURRENT vocabulary may not be FORTH or ASSEMBLER .  Any
+               given vocabulary may only be chained once, but may be the
+               object of any number of chainings.  For example, every user-
+               defined vocabulary may include the sequence:               
+                       CHAIN FORTH
+
+          CONTINUED    u --                          M                    
+               Continue interpretation at block u.
+
+          CUR          -- addr                       
+               A variable pointing to the physical record number before
+               which the tape is currently positioned.  REWIND sets CUR=1.
+
+          DBLOCK       ud -- addr                    M           "d-block"
+               Identical to BLOCK but with a 32-bit block unsigned number.
+
+
+
+
+                                         60
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          DPL          -- addr                       U             "d-p-l"
+               A variable containing the number of places after the
+               fractional point for input conversion.
+
+          FLD          -- addr                       U             "f-l-d"
+               A variable pointing to the field length reserved for a
+               number during output conversion.
+
+          H.           u --                          M             "h-dot"
+               Output u as a hexadecimal integer with one trailing blank.
+               The current base is unchanged.
+
+          I'           -- w                          C           "i-prime"
+               Used within a colon definition executed only from within a
+               do-loop to return the corresponding loop index.
+
+          IFEND                                      Interpret only"if-end"
+               Terminate a conditional interpretation sequence begun by
+               IFTRUE .
+
+          IFTRUE       flag --                    Interpret only "if-true"
+               Begin an:                             
+                       IFTRUE ... OTHERWISE ... IFEND                     
+               conditional sequence.  These conditional words operated
+               like:   
+                       IF ... ELSE ... THEN          
+               except that they cannot be nested, and are to be used only
+               during interpretation.  In conjunction with the words [ and
+               ] the words [ and ] they may be used within a colon
+               definition to control compilation, although they are not to
+               be compiled.
+
+          INDEX        u1 u2 --                      M                    
+               Print the first line of each screen over the range {u1..u2}.
+               This displays the first line of each screen of source text,
+               which conventionally contains a title.
+
+          LAST         -- addr                       U                    
+               A variable containing the address of the beginning of the
+               last dictionary entry made, which may not yet be a complete
+               or valid entry.
+
+          LINE         +n -- addr                    M                    
+               addr is the address of the beginning of line +n for the
+               screen whose number is contained in SCR .  The range of +n
+               is {0..15}.
+
+          LINELOAD     +n u --                                 "line-load"
+               Begin interpretation at line +n of screen u.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         61
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          LOADS        u --                          M                    
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       u LOADS <name>                
                                ____                 
+               When <name> is subsequently executed, block u will be
                     ____                                           
+               loaded.
+
+          MAP0         -- addr                                  "map-zero"
+               A variable pointing to the first location in the tape map.
+
+          MASK         n -- 16b                      
+               16b is a mask of n most-significant bits if n is positive,
+               or n least-significant bits if n is negative.
+
+          MOVE         addr1 addr2 u --              
+               The u bytes at address addr1 are moved to address addr2.
+               The data are moved such that the u bytes remaining at
+               address addr2 are the same data as was originally at address
+               addr1.  If u is zero nothing is moved.
+
+          MS           +n --                         M               "m-s"
+               Delay for approximately +n milliseconds.
+
+          NAND         16b1 16b2 -- 16b3             
+               16b3 is the one's complement of the logical AND of 16b1 with
+               16b2.
+
+          NOR          16b1 16b2 -- 16b3             
+               16b3 is the one's complement of the logical OR of 16b1 with
+               16b2.
+
+          NUMBER       addr -- d                     
+               Convert the count and character string at addr, to a signed
+               32-bit integer, using the value of BASE .  If numeric
+               conversion is not possible, an error condition exists.  The
+               string may contain a preceding minus sign.
+
+          O.           u --                          M             "o-dot"
+               Print u in octal format with one trailing blank.  The value
+               in BASE is unaffected.
+
+          OTHERWISE    --                            Interpret only       
+               An interpreter-level conditional word.  See:  IFTRUE
+
+          PAGE         --                            M                    
+               Clear the terminal screen or perform a form-feed action
+               suitable to the output device currently active.
+
+          READ-MAP     --                            M          "read-map"
+               Read to the next file mark on tape constructing a
+               correspondence table in memory (the map) relating physical
+               block position to logical block number.  The tape should
+               normally be rewound to its load point before executing READ-
+               MAP .
+
+
+
+
+                                         62
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          REMEMBER     --                            M                    
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       REMEMBER <name>               
                                 ____                
+               Defines a word which, when executed, will cause <name> and
                                                                ____     
+               all subsequently defined words to be deleted from the
+               dictionary.  <name> may be compiled into and executed from a
                             ____                                          
+               colon definition.  The sequence       
+                       DISCARD REMEMBER DISCARD      
+               provides a standardized preface to any group of transient
+               word definitions.
+
+          REWIND       --                            M                    
+               Rewind the tape to its load point, setting CUR equal to one.
+
+          ROTATE       16b1 n -- 16b2                
+               Rotate 16b1 left n bits if n is positive, right n bits if n
+               is negative.  Bits shifted out of one end of the cell are
+               shifted back in at the opposite end.
+
+          S0           -- addr                       U            "s-zero"
+               A variable containing the address of the bottom of the
+               stack.
+
+          SET          16b addr --                   M                    
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       16b addr SET <name>           
                                     ____            
+               Defines a word <name> which, when executed, will cause the
                               ____                                      
+               value 16b to be stored at addr.
+
+          SHIFT        16b1 n -- 16b2                
+               Logical shift 16b1 left n bits if n is positive, right n
+               bits if n is negative.  Zeros are shifted into vacated bit
+               positions.
+
+          TEXT         char --                       M                    
+               Accept characters from the input stream, as for WORD , into
+               PAD , blank-filling the remainder of PAD to 84 characters.
+
+          USER         +n --                         M                    
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       +n USER <name>                
                                ____                 
+               which creates a user variable <name>.  +n is the offset
                                              ____                    
+               within the user area where the value for <name> is stored.
                                                         ____            
+               Execution of <name> leaves its absolute user area storage
                             ____                                       
+               address.
+
+          WORDS        --                            M                    
+               List the word names in the first vocabulary of the currently
+               active search order.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         63
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          \LOOP        +n --                         C,I       "down-loop"
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               A do-loop terminating word.  The loop index is decremented
+               by the positive value +n.  If the unsigned magnitude of the
+               resultant index is less than or equal to the limit, then the
+               loop is terminated, otherwise execution returns to the
+               corresponding DO .  The comparison is unsigned.  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding DO .  See:  DO
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         64
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+
+
+                         APPENDIX C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          Since FORTH is an extensible language and subject to evolution,
+          the Standard contains a section describing experimental
+          proposals.  FORTH users are encouraged to study, implement, and
+          try these proposals to aid in the analysis of and the decision
+          for or against future adoption into the Standard.  Readers are
+          cautioned that these proposals contain opinions and conclusions
+          of the authors of the proposals and that these proposals may
+          contain non-standard source code.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         65
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          
+
+
+
+                       SEARCH ORDER SPECIFICATION AND CONTROL
+
+
+                                 WILLIAM F. RAGSDALE
+
+
+          1  INTRODUCTION
+
+               The method of selecting the order in which the dictionary is
+          searched has grown from unchained vocabularies to the present use
+          of chained vocabularies.  Many techniques are in use for
+          specification of the sequence in which multiple vocabularies may
+          be searched.  In order to offer generality and yet get precision
+          in specification, this proposal is offered.
+
+
+          2  DESCRIPTION
+
+          The following functions are required:
+
+          1.   Two search orders exist.  CONTEXT is the group of
+               vocabularies searched during interpretation of text from the
+               input stream.  CURRENT is the single vocabulary into which
+               new definitions are compiled, and from which FORGET
+               operates.
+
+          2.   Empty CONTEXT to a minimum number of system words.  These
+               are just the words to further specify the search order.
+
+          3.   Add individual vocabularies into CONTEXT.  The most recently
+               added is searched first.
+
+          4.   Specify which single vocabulary will become CURRENT.
+
+               The following optional functions aid the user:
+
+          1.   Display the word names of the first vocabulary in the
+               CONTEXT search order.
+
+          2.   Display the vocabulary names comprising CURRENT and CONTEXT
+               search orders.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         66
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          3  ADVANTAGES
+
+               Use over the past year has demonstrated that the proposed
+          methods may emulate the vocabulary selection of all other
+          systems.  The order is explicit by execution, may be interpreted
+          and compiled, and is obvious from the declaration.  The search
+          order is specified at run-time rather than the time a new
+          vocabulary is created.
+
+
+          4  DISADVANTAGES
+
+               By migrating to a common structure, vendors give up one
+          point at which they may claim their product is better than
+          others.  Another drawback is that the number of CONTEXT
+          vocabularies is fixed; older methods had an indefinite 'tree'
+          structure.  In practice, the branching of such a structure was
+          very rarely greater than four.
+
+               Forth words operate in a context sensitive environment, as
+          word names may be redefined and have different definitions in
+          different vocabularies.  This proposal compounds the problem.  By
+          displaying the search order names, the user at least can readily
+          verify the search order.
+
+
+          5  IMPACT
+
+               The text of the Forth 83 Standard has been carefully chosen
+          for consistency and generality.  However, no specification on how
+          the search order is developed by the user is given.  This
+          omission is unavoidable, due to the diversity of contemporary
+          practice.  This proposal is intended to complete the Forth 83
+          requirements in a fashion that exceeds all other methods.
+
+               Previously standardized words continue in their use:
+          VOCABULARY, FORTH, DEFINITIONS, and FORGET.  However, this
+          proposal assumes that vocabulary names are not IMMEDIATE .
+
+
+          6  DEFINITIONS
+
+          Search order:  
+               The sequence in which vocabularies are selected when
+               locating a word by name in the dictionary.  Consists of one
+               transient and up to three resident vocabularies.
+
+          Transient order:    
+               Execution of any vocabulary makes it the first vocabulary
+               searched, replacing the previously selected transient
+               vocabulary.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         67
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          Resident order:     
+               After searching the transient order, up to three additional
+               vocabularies may be searched.  The application program
+               controls this selection.
+
+
+          7  GLOSSARY
+
+          ONLY         --                            ONLY
+               Select just the ONLY vocabulary as both the transient
+               vocabulary and resident vocabulary in the search order.
+
+          FORTH        --                            ONLY                 
+               The name of the primary vocabulary.  Execution makes FORTH
+               the transient vocabulary, the first in the search order, and
+               thus replaces the previous transient vocabulary.
+
+          ALSO         --                            ONLY                 
+               The transient vocabulary becomes the first vocabulary in the
+               resident portion of the search order.  Up to the last two
+               resident vocabularies will also be reserved, in order,
+               forming the resident search order.
+
+          ORDER        --                            ONLY                 
+               Display the vocabulary names forming the search order in
+               their present search order sequence.  Then show the
+               vocabulary into which new definitions will be placed.
+
+          WORDS        --                            ONLY                 
+               Display the word names in the transient vocabulary, starting
+               with the most recent definition.
+
+          FORGET       --                            ONLY                 
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       FORGET <name>                 
                               ____                  
+               Delete from the dictionary <name> and all words added to the
                                           ____                            
+               dictionary after <name> regardless of the vocabulary.
                                 ____                               
+               Failure to find <name> is an error condition.  An error
                                ____                                  
+               condition also exists upon implicitly forgetting a
+               vocabulary (due to its definition after <name>).
                                                        ____   
+
+          DEFINITIONS  --                            ONLY                 
+               Select the transient vocabulary as the current vocabulary
+               into which subsequent definitions will be added.
+
+          SEAL         --                            ONLY                 
+               Delete all occurances of ONLY from the search order.  The
+               effect is that only specified application vocabularies will
+               be searched.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         68
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          8  TYPICAL SOURCE CODE
+
+           0 ( ALSO  ONLY                                     82jun12 WFR )
+           1 ( note the systems -FIND searches 1 to 5 vocabs in CONTEXT   )
+           2 VOCABULARY ONLY    ONLY DEFINITIONS
+           3 : ALSO                       ( slide transient into resident )
+           4       CONTEXT DUP 2+ 6 CMOVE>  ;
+           5
+           6    HERE 2+ ]          ( alter run time from usual vocabulary )
+           7        DOES>  CONTEXT 8 ERASE DUP CONTEXT !    CONTEXT 8 + !
+           8               ALSO  EXIT [
+           9        ' ONLY CFA !        ( Patch into ONLY; make NULL word )
+          10 CREATE X  ' EXIT >BODY X !     41088 ' X NFA ! IMMEDIATE
+          11 : FORTH      FORTH ;
+          12 : DEFINITIONS DEFINITIONS ;         : FORGET  FORGET ;
+          13 : VOCABULARY  VOCABULARY  ;         : ONLY      ONLY ;
+          14 : WORDS       WORDS  ;
+          15
+
+           0 ( ORDER                                         82jun12 WFR )
+           1 : ORDER     ( show the search order )
+           2    10 SPACES  CONTEXT 10 OVER + SWAP
+           3       DO I @ ?DUP 0= ?LEAVE  ID. 2 +LOOP
+           4  10 SPACES  CURRENT @ ID.  ;
+           5
+           6 ONLY FORTH ALSO   DEFINITIONS
+           7
+           8
+           9
+          10
+          11
+          12
+          13
+          14
+          15
+
+
+          9  EXAMPLES OF USE
+
+               ONLY           reduce search order to minimum
+               FORTH          search FORTH then ONLY
+               ALSO EDITOR    search EDITOR, FORTH then ONLY
+               DEFINITIONS    new definitions will be added into the EDITOR
+
+               The same sequence would be compiled:
+
+               : SETUP  ONLY FORTH  ALSO EDITOR DEFINITIONS ;
+
+
+          10  REFERENCES
+
+          W. F. Ragsdale, The 'ONLY' Concept for Vocabularies, Proceedings
                                                               ___________
+          of the 1982 FORML Conference, pub. Forth Interest Group.
          ____________________________                            
+
+
+
+
+                                         69
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          W. F. Ragsdale, fig-FORTH Installation Manual, Forth Interest
                          _____________________________                
+          Group.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         70
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          
+
+
+
+                    DEFINITION FIELD ADDRESS CONVERSION OPERATORS
+
+
+                                         by
+
+                                    Kim R. Harris
+
+
+          A.  INTRODUCTION
+
+          The standard provides a transportable way to obtain the
+          compilation address of a definition in the dictionary of a FORTH
+          system (cf., FIND and ' ).  It also provides an operator to
+          convert a compilation address to its corresponding parameter
+          field address.  However, the standard does not provide a
+          transportable way to convert either of these addresses to the
+          other fields of a definition.  Since various FORTH
+          implementations have different dictionary structures, a standard
+          set of conversion operators would increase transportability and
+          readability.
+
+          A set of words is proposed which allows the conversion of any
+          definitions field address to any other.
+
+
+          B.  GLOSSARY
+
+          In the following words, the compilation address is either the
+          source or the destination, so it is not indicated in the names.
+
+          >BODY        addr1 -- addr2                            "to-body"
+               addr2 is the parameter field address corresponding to the
+               compilation address addr1.
+
+          >NAME        addr1 -- addr2                            "to-name"
+               addr2 is the name field address corresponding to the
+               compilation address addr1.
+
+          >LINK        addr1 -- addr2                            "to-link"
+               addr2 is the link field address corresponding to the
+               compilation address addr1.
+
+          BODY>        addr1 -- addr2                          "from-body"
+               addr2 is the compilation address corresponding to the
+               parameter field address addr1.
+
+          NAME>        addr1 -- addr2                          "from-name"
+               addr2 is the compilation address corresponding to the name
+               field address addr1.
+
+
+
+
+                                         71
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          LINK>        addr1 -- addr2                          "from-link"
+               addr2 is the compilation address corresponding to the link
+               field address addr1.
+
+          The previous set of words is complete, but may be inefficient for
+          going between two fields when one is not the compilation address.
+          For greater efficiency, additional operators may be defined which
+          name both the source and destination fields.
+
+          N>LINK       addr1 -- addr2                       "name-to-link"
+               addr2 is the link field address corresponding to the name
+               field address addr1.
+
+          L>NAME       addr1 -- addr2                       "link-to-name"
+               addr2 is the name field address corresponding to the link
+               field address addr1.
+
+
+          C.  DISCUSSION
+
+          The previous words provide a complete, consistent, and efficient
+          set of definition field address conversion operations.  They can
+          be implemented in a FORTH system which uses any combination of
+          the following options for its dictionary structure:
+
+               Link fields first or second.
+               Fixed or variable length name fields.
+               Additional fields in the definitions structure.
+
+               Heads contiguous or separated from bodies.
+
+               Indirect, direct, subroutine, or token threaded code.
+
+          The words are compatible with this standard; their inclusion
+          would not require other changes to be made to the standard.
+
+          Disadvantages to including them in the standard include:
+
+               They add 6 to 8 more words to the standard.
+
+               A standard program may not use all of them since it is not
+               allowed to access the name or link fields.  However, this
+               does not disqualify them from being in the standard.
+
+               If a definition's head is not in the dictionary, an error
+               condition would exist.  In this case, what action should the
+               words take in an implemented system?
+
+          The author of this experimental proposal recommends that FORTH
+          system implementors try them and that they be included in the
+          System Word Set of the next FORTH standard.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         72
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          D.  SOURCE CODE EXAMPLE
+
+          High level source code is shown below for a very simple
+          dictionary structure.  This code assumes a FORTH system which
+          uses indirect threaded code, heads contiguous to bodies, and a
+          definition structure of the following format:
+
+               Name field, 4 bytes long, fixed length.
+               Link field, 2 bytes long.
+               Code field, 2 bytes long.
+               Parameter field, variable length.
+
+          : >BODY   ( acf -- apf )  2+  ;
+          : BODY>   ( apf -- acf )  2-  ;
+          : >LINK   ( acf -- alf )  2-  ;
+          : LINK>   ( alf -- acf )  2-  ;
+          : >NAME   ( acf -- anf )  6 - ;
+          : NAME>   ( anf -- alf )  6 + ;
+          : N>LINK  ( anf -- alf )  4 + ;
+          : L>NAME  ( alf -- anf )  4 - ;
+
+
+          E.  EXAMPLES OF USE
+
+          No examples are given because their use should be obvious.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         73
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+
+
+                                     APPENDIX D.
+                                          
+                                          
+                                       CHARTER
+                                          
+                                       of the
+                                          
+                                FORTH STANDARDS TEAM
+
+
+
+          1.  Purpose and Goals
+
+
+          1.1  Purpose
+
+               1.1.1  This Charter establishes and guides a voluntary
+               membership professional organization, the FORTH Standards
+               Team (hereafter referred to as the "FST") and provides a
+               method for its operation.
+
+
+          1.2  Goals
+
+               1.2.1  The goal of the FST is the creation, maintenance, and
+               proliferation of a standard (hereafter referred to as the
+               "Standard") for the FORTH computer programming system and
+               for application programs executed by a Standard system.  The
+               Standard shall specify requirements and constraints which
+               such computer software must satisfy.
+
+               1.2.2  The team shall also develop a method of
+               identification and labeling of FORTH implementations and
+               programs which conform to the Standard.
+
+
+          1.3  Organization
+
+               1.3.1  The FST is a voluntary membership organization with
+               no formal status as a legal entity.  It operates by
+               consensus of the professional and commercial FORTH community
+               and conducts business by the professional discourse and
+               agreement of its members.  It is intended that this Charter
+               be a guide to the operation of the FST subject to reasonable
+               minor digression, rather than being a rigid document under
+               which vested rights are granted.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         74
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+          2.  METHODS
+
+
+          2.1  Formal Meetings
+
+               2.1.1  The FST shall hold periodic formal meetings for
+               discussion and decisions concerning a current or future
+               Standard.
+
+               2.1.2  There is not specified frequency for formal meetings.
+               Each meeting shall be at such time and place as was decided
+               at the prior meeting.  If a meeting cannot be held as
+               decided, the Chairperson may designate another time and
+               place.
+
+               2.1.3  The Chairperson shall send a written notice at least
+               sixty (60) days in advance of each formal meeting to each
+               voting member.  A longer notification period is recommended.
+               It is anticipated that the continuing close coordination of
+               the participants, the decision at the prior formal meeting,
+               and publication of a meeting notice in FORTH Dimensions and
                                                      ________________    
+               other trade journals will provide sufficient notice to the
+               FORTH community.
+
+               2.1.4  At a formal FST meeting, there shall be general
+               sessions consisting of all attendees.  General sessions are
+               for matters that are ready for discussion and decision.  All
+               votes concerning the Standard, Charter, or FST procedures
+               must take place during a general session.
+
+               2.1.5  Also at formal meetings, subteams will be established
+               to examine groups of proposals and to prepare
+               recommendations for a general session.  All meeting
+               attendees may participate in the work and voting of a
+               subteam.  Each subteam should elect from its members a
+               coordinator to conduct its meetings and a reporter to record
+               and report its recommendations.
+
+               2.1.6  The Chairperson may publish and distribute an agenda
+               at or in advance of a formal meeting.  As a guideline, each
+               day of a formal meeting begins with a general session,
+               followed by concurrent subteam meetings followed by another
+               general session.
+
+               2.1.7  In view of the voluntary nature of the FST, at least
+               one third of the membership is required to hold a formal
+               meeting.  Two thirds of the number of voting members present
+               at the start of each day's first general session shall set
+               the quorum for the remainder of that day.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         75
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+               2.1.8  Between formal meetings, the Chairperson may appoint
+               such informal working groups as is appropriate.  Each group
+               may be given a goal and scope to direct its activities.  Its
+               conclusions or recommendations must be given to the
+               Chairperson in written form.
+
+
+          2.2  Proposals and Comments
+
+               2.2.1  Prior to each formal meeting, the Chairperson may
+               solicit submission of comments and proposals for changes,
+               additions, or deletions to the then-current Standard, the
+               draft Standard or this Charter.  A cutoff date may be
+               specified for the submission of such proposals.
+
+               2.2.2  A considerable amount of information must accompany
+               each proposal to help FST members analyze the proposal.
+               Therefore, submission of proposals and comments shall be
+               according to the format and instructions shown in the
+               "Proposal/Comment Form" included as an Appendix to this
+               Standard.  Any proposal not in the appropriate form or
+               received after the cutoff date may not be considered unless
+               the Chairperson deems it to be of sufficient significance.
+
+               2.2.3  Unsolicited proposals and comments by volunteers are
+               acknowledged as valuable.  Any individual or group may
+               submit proposals and/or comments concerning the Standard or
+               this Charter.  These should be sent to the official address
+               of the FST.  Properly formatted proposals and comments are
+               preferred.  The author or a representative should plan to
+               attend the next formal meeting to emphasize, support, and
+               possibly modify the proposals.
+
+               2.2.4  Since the quantity of proposals and comments may
+               exceed the number for which there is time to be voted upon,
+               submission of a proposal does not automatically mean that it
+               will be voted upon at the next formal FST meeting.  The
+               Chairperson or some members appointed by the Chairperson or
+               elected by the voting members may screen and organize the
+               received proposals and comments for voting upon at the next
+               formal meeting.
+
+               2.2.5  To allow reflection and examination, proposals and
+               comments shall be distributed to FST voting members and
+               sponsors in advance of a formal meeting.  Proposals and
+               comments not distributed in advance, including proposals
+               made during a formal meeting, may be considered at the
+               discretion of the Chairperson.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         76
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+          2.3  Draft Standard
+
+               After a formal meeting, the referees and officers of the FST
+               shall prepare a draft Standard for review by the then-
+               current FST voting members.  The referees and officers shall
+               consolidate proposals accepted by vote during the meeting,
+               resolve any ambiguities or problems, and incorporate these
+               changes with the text of the previous Standard or draft
+               Standard.
+
+
+          2.4  Standard
+
+               2.4.1  The referees and officers may, by near unanimous
+               decision (not more than one no vote), declare the draft
+               Standard, as mentioned in the previous paragraph, as being
+               the proposed Standard.
+
+               2.4.2  A proposed Standard shall be distributed to all FST
+               voting members for a mail ballot.  This ballot shall be
+               based solely on the text of the proposed Standard as
+               distributed.
+
+               2.4.3  Each ballot returned shall be signed by the voting
+               member submitting it.  An affirmative vote of at least two
+               thirds of the voting members shall adopt the document.  Such
+               adoption makes the draft Standard the current, official FST
+               Standard which supersedes all prior Standards.
+
+
+          2.5  Charter
+
+               2.5.1  At a formal FST meeting, the charter may be amended
+               by a simple majority of voting members present provided that
+               at least one third of all voting members are present; such
+               amendments become effective at the end of the current formal
+               meeting.
+
+               2.5.2  At other than a formal FST meeting, the charter may
+               be amended by a simple majority of all voting members, such
+               vote to be taken by signed mail ballots.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         77
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+          3.  MEMBERSHIP
+
+
+          3.1  General
+
+               Membership in the FST is a privilege, not a right.  An
+               invitation for voting membership may be extended to those
+               who the FST feels can contribute to the goals of the
+               Standard and the FST.  There are several classes of
+               participation in the efforts of the FST.  Membership in each
+               class has no specified term but continues from the time when
+               membership is initiated to the conclusion of the next formal
+               meeting.
+
+
+          3.2  Voting Members
+
+               3.2.1  Voting members are individuals who are elected into
+               such membership at the concluding session of a formal FST
+               meeting.  Any voting member who resigns between formal
+               meetings shall not be replaced until the membership
+               elections at the conclusion of the next formal meeting.  A
+               newly elected voting member gains voting rights only after
+               all voting members have been elected.  A significant
+               professional FORTH background is required of voting members.
+
+               3.2.2  Each voting member present at a formal meeting shall
+               indicate in writing his or her desire to continue as a
+               voting member.  Only these voting members can vote in a
+               general session of a formal meeting on any matters affecting
+               the Standard or the Charter and on the election of all
+               voting members.
+
+               3.2.3  Voting members are elected by a simple majority of
+               those voting members present.  The number of voting members
+               shall be limited to thirty (30).  Individuals eligible to be
+               elected are selected from each of the following ordered
+               categories in order, until the number of voting members
+               reaches the limit.
+
+                    3.2.3.1  Category 1:  current voting member who have
+                    actively participated in at least two days of a formal
+                    meeting.  Voting members are expected to actively
+                    participate in subteam meetings and all general
+                    sessions.
+
+                    3.2.3.2  Category 2:  current voting members who are
+                    not eligible by Category 1, but who have requested in
+                    writing that his or her voting membership be
+                    maintained.
+
+                    3.2.3.3  Category 3:  eligible candidates.  Eligible
+                    candidates will be presented to the voting members then
+                    elected as follows:
+
+
+
+                                         78
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+                         3.2.3.3.1  If the number of eligible candidates
+                         does not exceed the number of openings for voting
+                         membership, each candidate is voted upon and
+                         accepted by a simple majority.
+
+                         3.2.3.3.2  If the number of eligible candidates
+                         does exceed the number of openings for voting
+                         membership, candidates will be voted upon by
+                         ballot whereby each voting member may vote for up
+                         to the number of openings remaining.  Those
+                         candidates receiving the most votes will be
+                         elected until there are no more openings for
+                         voting membership.
+
+
+          3.3  Candidates
+
+               3.3.1  Candidates are individuals who desire to actively
+               participate in and support the FST by becoming voting
+               members.
+
+               3.3.2  To be eligible, each Candidate must:  declare in
+               writing to the secretary at the first general session of a
+               formal FST meeting that he or she is a Candidate, actively
+               participate in subteam meetings and all general sessions at
+               a formal FST meeting, and have a significant professional
+               background in FORTH.  The Chairperson may request
+               information or ask questions of any candidate to determine
+               his or her technical knowledge and experience.  Candidates
+               are expected to submit proposals, participate in the
+               discussions of the formal meeting, and contribute to the
+               work and voting of subteams.
+
+
+          3.4  Observers
+
+               3.4.1  Observers are individuals who attend a formal meeting
+               but are neither voting members nor candidates.  At the
+               discretion of the Chairperson, they may contribute to the
+               discussion at general sessions and to the work of subteams.
+               The number of observers allowed at a formal meeting may be
+               limited by the Chairperson.
+
+
+          3.5  FST Sponsors
+
+               3.5.1  FST sponsors are individuals or organizations who
+               contribute funds and other assistance to aid the work of the
+               FST.  FST sponsors have no duties or responsibilities in the
+               FST, but they will receive copies of proposals and comments
+               considered at a formal meeting, and drafts and adopted
+               standards prepared as a result of that meeting.
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         79
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+               3.5.3  FST sponsorship exists from the end of one formal
+               meeting to the end of the next formal meeting.
+
+               3.5.3  Qualification of FST sponsors may be determined by a
+               simple majority vote at a formal FST meeting.  If no such
+               qualification exist, the Chairperson may specify
+               qualifications, including the amount of financial
+               contributions, which will remain in effect until the next
+               formal FST meeting.
+
+
+          4.  OFFICERS
+
+
+          4.1  General
+
+               There shall be four types of elected officers of the FST:
+               the Chairperson, the Secretary, the Treasurer, and one or
+               more Referees.  Each officer shall be elected at a formal
+               meeting of the FST and serve until the next formal meeting.
+
+
+          4.2  Vacancies
+
+               If any office other than the Chairperson becomes vacant
+               between formal meetings, the Chairperson may appoint a
+               replacement.  If the office of the Chairperson becomes
+               vacant between formal meetings, a new Chairperson shall be
+               elected by an informal majority vote of the remaining
+               officers.  At any formal meeting, any officer, including the
+               Chairperson, may be replaced by a simple majority vote of
+               the voting members present at that meeting.
+
+
+          4.3  Chairperson
+
+               4.3.1  The Chairperson is responsible for governing the
+               general business of the FST.  He or she is responsible for
+               implementing the FST's Charter and any other requirements
+               specified by the Standard.
+
+               4.3.2  The Chairperson's term of office shall be from the
+               conclusion of the formal meeting at which he or she is
+               elected to the conclusion of the next formal meeting.  The
+               election of a Chairperson is held at the concluding general
+               session of a formal meeting after the election of voting
+               members; hence, newly elected voting members may vote for
+               the Chairperson.  Only voting members are eligible to be
+               elected Chairperson.
+
+               4.3.3  The Chairperson shall conduct each formal meeting.
+               In general, the meetings will follow the current Robert's
                                                                ________
+               Rules of Order; however, the Chairperson may determine the
               ______________                                            
+               specific rules for a formal meeting.
+
+
+
+                                         80
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+               4.3.4  Any matter needing a decision between formal meetings
+               not specified by this Charter shall be decided by the
+               Chairperson.
+
+               4.3.5  The Chairperson has duties and responsibilities
+               specified elsewhere in this Charter.
+
+
+          4.4  Secretary
+
+               4.4.1  The Secretary is responsible for recording the
+               activities and results of the FST.
+
+               4.4.2  The Secretary is elected at the first general session
+               of a formal meeting and serves until a Secretary is elected
+               at the beginning of the next formal meeting.
+
+               4.4.3  The Secretary has many responsibilities.
+
+               4.4.3.1  The Secretary is responsible for collecting,
+               maintaining, and archiving the official copies of the
+               Standard, the Charter, all other FST documents,
+               correspondence, and lists of the FST members of each class.
+
+               4.4.3.2  During a formal meeting, the Secretary is
+               responsible for:
+
+                    (a)  Keeping the minutes of the general sessions,
+                    including all votes taken.  For votes affecting the
+                    Standard or Charter, he or she shall:  record the
+                    number of voting members present, determine if a quorum
+                    is present, determine the number of affirmative votes
+                    required for the vote to pass, the number of voting
+                    members voting in the affirmative and negative, and the
+                    result of the vote.
+
+                    (b)  Recording and verifying the attendance and
+                    membership class of each attendee.
+
+                    (c)  Recording the recommendations of subteams.
+
+               4.4.3.3  The Secretary is also responsible for collecting,
+               archiving, and distributing proposals before a formal
+               meeting.  He or she is also responsible for incorporating
+               proposals accepted during a formal meeting into the Standard
+               or Charter.  Other officers aid the Secretary in these
+               duties.
+
+          4.5  Treasurer
+
+               4.5.1  The Treasurer is responsible for managing the
+               financial business of the FST.  He or she is responsible for
+               maintaining accurate and current financial records and for
+               accepting and dispersing funds for official FST activities.
+
+
+
+                                         81
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+               4.5.2  The Treasurer's term of office shall be from the
+               conclusion of the formal meeting at which he or she is
+               elected to the conclusion of the next formal meeting.  The
+               election of a Treasurer is held just after the election of
+               the Chairperson.  Only voting members are eligible to be
+               elected Treasurer.
+
+
+          4.6  Referees
+
+               4.6.1  At the conclusion of a formal meeting there may be
+               additional technical work required to prepare a draft
+               Standard or Charter.  This work shall be performed by the
+               officers of the FST, including a group of Referees.  They
+               should be individuals who have superior knowledge and
+               experience in the implementation and use of FORTH.
+
+               4.6.2  At least three and no more than five Referees shall
+               be elected by a majority of the voting members present at
+               the concluding general sessions of a formal meeting.  This
+               takes place after the election of voting members.  A
+               Referee's term is from election at the end of one formal
+               meeting until the end of the next formal meeting.  Only
+               voting members are eligible to be elected as Referees.
+
+               4.6.3  The Referees shall adopt methods and rules as they
+               deem appropriate to complete their work; they may be
+               informal.  However, any matter committed to the Referees for
+               resolution must achieve near unanimous agreement (not more
+               than one no vote).  Lacking that, the matter shall be
+               omitted from further action pending further consideration at
+               the next formal meeting.
+
+
+          5.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          5.1  General
+
+               5.1.1  Since FORTH is an extensible language and subject to
+               evolution, the Standard may contain a section describing
+               experimental proposal to aid in the analysis of and the
+               decision for or against future adoption into the Standard.
+               After the results of experimentation are known, each
+               proposal will be considered, at a future formal meeting, for
+               inclusion into the Standard.
+
+               5.1.2  An experimental proposal may be individual FORTH
+               words, sets of related words, or specifications for part of
+               the Standard.  Experimental proposals may be derived from
+               ordinary proposals or other contributions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         82
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+          5.2  Required Information
+
+               Each experimental proposal must contain the following
+               minimum information:
+
+               5.2.1  A description of the proposal including an overview
+               of its functions and its interactions with existing FORTH
+               words.
+
+               5.2.2  A glossary entry of each word in the form and
+               notation of the Standard.
+
+               5.2.3  A statement by the author(s) indicating why the
+               proposal meets inclusion into the Standard.  Both advantages
+               and disadvantages should be discussed.
+
+
+          5.3  Suggested Information
+
+               It is suggested that each experimental proposal also
+               include:
+
+               5.3.1  A source definition for each word in the proposal.
+               High level definitions using Standard words are preferred,
+               but new primitive words may be defined in an assembly
+               language of one commonly-known processor.  Sufficient
+               documentation should be provided so that implementation on
+               other processors is direct.
+
+               5.3.2  An example showing usage of the new words.
+
+
+          6.  VOTING
+
+
+          6.1  General
+
+               Only voting members have the right to vote on proposals
+               affecting the Standard, a draft Standard, or this Charter.
+
+
+          6.2  Advisory Votes
+
+               At the discretion of the Chairperson, advisory votes may be
+               requested at a formal meeting.  At the discretion of the
+               Chairperson, all attendees may participate in an advisory
+               vote.
+
+
+          6.3  Method
+
+               Any vote at a formal meeting may be by show of hands or, at
+               the discretion of the Chairperson, by an informal secret
+               paper ballot or a roll call.
+
+
+
+                                         83
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+          6.4  Number
+
+               A vote to adopt a proposal into the draft Standard or to
+               change the Standard, except for the Experimental Proposals
+               section of the Standard requires a two-thirds affirmative
+               vote of the voting members present at a general session of a
+               formal meeting, provided that the number of votes cast are
+               at least two thirds of that morning's quorum count.  To
+               adopt an experimental proposal into the Experimental
+               Proposals section of the draft Standard or to change this
+               Charter, an affirmative vote of a simple majority is
+               required.  Accepting any other procedural matter at a formal
+               meeting requires only a simple majority affirmative vote.
+
+
+          6.5  Proxies
+
+               All votes must be cast by the particular voting member
+               eligible to vote.  No proxy voting is allowed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         84
+
+
+
+
+
+          E.  PROPOSAL/COMMENT FORM
+
+
+
+
+                         APPENDIX E.  PROPOSAL/COMMENT FORM
+
+
+          The following pages are the proposal and/or comment submittal
+          form.  The form includes instructions which should be
+          explanatory.  Copies of submitted proposals and comments will be
+          made available to FORTH Standards Team members and to team
+          sponsors.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         85
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                       FST Proposal and Comment Submittal Form
+          -----------------------------------------------------------------
+          FST USER  Title:                             Proposal Number:
+           ONLY --> Related Proposals:                 Disposition:
+          =================================================================
+          Keyword(s):                                       Category:
+                                              ( ) Proposal  or  ( ) Comment
+          FORTH Word(s):                      Section #(s):
+          -----------------------------------------------------------------
+          Abstract:
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          -----------------------------------------------------------------
+          Proposal and Discussion:
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          ----------------------------------------------------------------
+          Submitted by:                                      Date:
+                                                             Page    of
+          =================================================================
+          FORTH Standards Team; PO Box 4545; Mountain View, CA 94040 820801
+
+
+
+                                          86
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+          
+
+                  Proposal and Comment Submittal Form Instructions
+
+          Please use the supplied forms for your entire proposal.  The
+          continuation form is only to be used if absolutely necessary; try
+          to get your proposal to fit on the first sheet.  If it helps, use
+          a reducing copy machine to get more material onto the first
+          sheet.  If you must use multiple sheets, put the main idea onto
+          the first sheet and less important material onto continuation
+          sheets.  Remember that material on continuation sheets may be
+          overlooked.
+
+          The proposal forms have been produced on a computer system so
+          that you may produce your proposals using your own computer
+          system.  If you print your proposal and form on your computer
+          system, all of the information shown on the form(s) MUST be
+          printed and in the same location.
+
+          The following are the instructions for each of the areas of the
+          form:
+
+          1.   Please think of the most appropriate keyword or keywords
+               describing your proposal.
+
+          2.   Select the best of the following categories of proposals:
+               0    Nucleus Layer other than #1 (i.e., +  AND )
+               1    Memory Operations (i.e., @  CMOVE )
+               2    Dictionary (i.e., '  FORGET )
+               3    String Operations (i.e., WORD  COUNT )
+               4    Interpreter Layer other than #2 or #3 (i.e., ABORT  . )
+               5    Compiler Layer (i.e., :  DO )
+               6    Device Layer (i.e., BLOCK  TYPE )
+               7    Experimental (i.e., 32-bit stack entries)
+               8    Other Technical (i.e., mono-addressing)
+               9    Charter
+
+          3.   Mark whether this is a PROPOSAL or a COMMENT.
+
+          4.   Indicate which FORTH word or words are relevant.
+
+          5.   Indicate which section or sections of the Standard are
+               relevant.
+
+          6.   The abstract must be kept short.  The title, keywords,
+               category, and abstract may be used in a database for
+               organization and display on a terminal during a Standards
+               Team meeting.
+
+          7.   Detail your proposal and provide supporting discussion.
+
+          8.   Indicate the name of the submitter or the names of the
+               submitters.
+
+
+
+
+                                          87
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+          9.   Finally, date the submittal and number each page.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          88
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                FST Proposal and Comment Submittal Continuation Form
+          -----------------------------------------------------------------
+          FST USE ONLY -->                             Proposal Number:
+          =================================================================
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          -----------------------------------------------------------------
+          Submitted by:                                Date:
+                                                             Page   of
+          =================================================================
+          FORTH Standards Team; PO Box 4545; Mountain View, CA 94040 820801
+
+
+
+                                          89
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-0.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e93f578
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,265 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                  FORTH-83 STANDARD
+                                          
+                      A PUBLICATION OF THE FORTH STANDARDS TEAM
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                     AUGUST 1983
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+          FORTH-83 STANDARD
+
+
+          
+
+                       COPYRIGHT c. 1983  FORTH STANDARDS TEAM
+
+          Permission is hereby granted to reproduce this document in whole
+          or in part provided that such reproductions refer to the fact
+          that the copied material is subject to copyright by the FORTH
+          Standards Team.  No changes or modifications may be made to the
+          copied material unless it is clearly indicated that such changes
+          were not incorporated in the original copyrighted work.
+
+          The existence of a FORTH Standard does not in any respect
+          preclude anyone, whether the individual has approved this
+          Standard or not, from implementing, marketing, purchasing or
+          using products, processes, or procedures not conforming to the
+          Standard.  FORTH Standards are subject to periodic review and
+          users are cautioned to obtain the latest editions.
+
+          ISBN 0-914699-03-2
+
+          FORTH STANDARDS TEAM
+          P.O. BOX 4545
+          MOUNTAIN VIEW, CA  94040
+          USA
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         ii
+
+
+
+
+
+          FORTH-83 STANDARD
+
+
+          
+
+                                  TABLE OF CONTENTS
+
+          1.   FOREWORD  ...............................................  1
+          2.   PURPOSE  ................................................  2
+          3.   SCOPE  ..................................................  2
+          4.   TRADEOFFS  ..............................................  3
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS  ...................................  4
+          6.   REFERENCES  ............................................. 12
+          7.   REQUIREMENTS  ........................................... 13
+          8.   COMPLIANCE AND LABELING  ................................ 15
+          9.   USAGE  .................................................. 17
+          10.  ERROR CONDITIONS  ....................................... 20
+          11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION  ...................................... 22
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET  ...................................... 25
+          13.  DOUBLE NUMBER EXTENSION WORD SET  ....................... 41
+          14.  ASSEMBLER EXTENSION WORD SET  ........................... 44
+          15.  SYSTEM EXTENSION WORD SET  .............................. 46
+          16.  CONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS  ............................. 48
+          
+          APPENDICES
+               A.   FORTH STANDARDS TEAM MEMBERSHIP  ................... 51
+               B.   UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS  ...................... 54
+               C.   EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS  ............................ 60
+                    C.1  SEARCH ORDER SPECIFICATION AND CONTROL  ....... 61
+                    C.2  DEFINITION FIELD ADDRESS CONVERSION OPERATORS . 66
+               D.   STANDARDS TEAM CHARTER  ............................ 69
+               E.   PROPOSAL/COMMENT FORM AND INSTRUCTIONS  ............ 78
+          
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         iii
+
+
+
+
+
+          FORTH-83 STANDARD
+
+
+          
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         iv
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-1.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-1.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..270a2fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-1.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+
+
+
+          1.   FOREWORD
+
+
+
+
+                                    1.   FOREWORD
+
+
+          FORTH is an integrated programming approach and computer
+          language.  FORTH was invented by Mr. Charles Moore specifically
+          to increase programmer productivity in the development of
+          computer related applications without sacrificing machine
+          efficiency.  FORTH is a layered environment containing the
+          elements of a computer language as well as those of an operating
+          system and a machine monitor.  This extensible, layered
+          environment provides for highly interactive program development
+          and testing.
+
+          In the interests of transportability of application software
+          written in FORTH, standardization efforts began in the mid-1970s
+          by the European FORTH User's Group (EFUG).  This effort resulted
+          in the FORTH-77 Standard.  As the language continued to evolve,
+          an interim FORTH-78 Standard was published by the FORTH Standards
+          Team.  Following FORTH Standards Team meetings in 1979 the FORTH-
+          79 Standard was published in 1980.
+
+          The FORTH Standards Team is comprised of individuals who have a
+          great variety of experience and technical expertise with FORTH.
+          The FORTH Standards Team consists of both users and implementers.
+          Comments, proposals, and correspondence should be mailed to:
+          FORTH Standards Team, P.O. Box 4545, Mountain View, CA 94040 USA.
+
+          FORTH's extensibility allows the language to be expanded and
+          adapted to special needs and different hardware systems.  A
+          programmer or vendor may choose to strictly adhere with the
+          standard, but the choice to deviate is acknowledged as beneficial
+          and sometimes necessary.  If the standard does not explicitly
+          specify a requirement or restriction, a system or application may
+          utilize any choice without sacrificing compliance to the standard
+          provided that the system or application remains transportable and
+          obeys the other requirements of the standard.
+
+               
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          1
+
+
+          
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-10.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-10.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2fbb56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-10.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+
+
+
+
+          10.  ERROR CONDITIONS
+
+
+
+
+                                10.  ERROR CONDITIONS
+
+
+
+          10.1 Possible Actions on an Error
+
+          When an error condition occurs, a Standard System may take one or
+          more of the following actions:
+
+          1.   ignore and continue;
+
+          2.   display a message;
+
+          3.   execute a particular word;
+
+          4.   set interpret state and interpret a block;
+
+          5.   set interpret state and begin interpretation;
+
+          6.   other system dependent actions.
+
+          See:  "7.1 Documentation Requirements"
+
+
+          10.2 General Error Conditions
+
+          The following error conditions apply in many situations.  These
+          error conditions are listed below, but may occur at various times
+          and with various words.
+
+          1.   input stream exhausted before encountering a required <name>
+               or delimiting character;
+
+          2.   insufficient stack space or insufficient number of stack
+               entries during text interpretation or compilation;
+
+          3.   a word not found and not a valid number, during text
+               interpretation or compilation;
+
+          4.   compilation of incorrectly nested control structures;
+
+          5.   execution of words restricted to compilation only, when not
+               in the compile state and while not compiling a colon
+               definition;
+
+          6.   FORGETting within the system to a point that removes a word
+               required for correct execution;
+
+          7.   insufficient space remaining in the dictionary;
+
+          8.   a stack parameter out of range, e.g., a negative number when
+               a +n was specified in the glossary;
+
+
+
+                                         21
+
+
+
+
+
+          10.  ERROR CONDITIONS
+
+
+          9.   correct mass storage read or write was not possible.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         22
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-11.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-11.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..752f132
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-11.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
+
+
+
+
+          11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION
+
+
+
+
+                               11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION
+
+
+
+          11.1 Order
+
+          The glossary definitions are listed in ASCII alphabetical order.
+
+
+          11.2 Capitalization
+
+          Word names are capitalized throughout this Standard.
+
+
+          11.3 Stack Notation
+
+          The stack parameters input to and output from a definition are
+          described using the notation:
+
+               before -- after
+
+                    before    stack parameters before execution
+                    after     stack parameters after execution
+
+          In this notation, the top of the stack is to the right.  Words
+          may also be shown in context when appropriate.
+
+          Unless otherwise noted, all stack notation describes exectution
+          time.  If it applies at compile time, the line is followed by:
+          (compiling) .
+
+
+          11.4 Attributes
+
+          Capitalized symbols indicate attributes of the defined words:
+
+          C    The word may only be used during compilation of a colon
+               definition.
+
+          I    Indicates that the word is IMMEDIATE and will execute during
+               compilation, unless special action is taken.
+
+          M    This word has a potential multiprogramming impact.     
+               See:  "9.7 Multiprogramming Impact"
+
+          U    A user variable.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         23
+
+
+
+
+
+          11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION
+
+
+          11.5 Serial Numbers
+
+          When a substantive alteration to a word's definition is made or
+          when a new word is added, the serial number will be the last two
+          digits of the year of the Standard in which such change was made
+          (i.e., "83").  When such change is made within a Working Draft,
+          the number will be suffixed with the character identifying the
+          draft (i.e., "83A").
+
+
+          11.6 Pronunciation
+
+          The natural language pronunciation of word names is given in
+          double quotes (") where it differs from English pronunciation.
+
+
+          11.7 Stack Parameters
+
+          Unless otherwise stated, all references to numbers apply to 16-
+          bit signed integers.  The implied range of values is shown as
+          {from..to}.  The contents of an address is shown by double
+          braces, particularly for the contents of variables, i.e., BASE
+          {{2..72}}.
+
+          The following are the stack parameter abbreviations and types of
+          numbers used throughout the glossary.  These abbreviations may be
+          suffixed with a digit to differentiate multiple parameters of the
+          same type.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         24
+
+
+
+
+
+          11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION
+
+
+          Stack     Number                   Range in            Minimum
+          Abbrv.    Type                     Decimal             Field
+          
+          flag      boolean                  0=false, else=true  16
+          true      boolean                  -1 (as a result)    16
+          false     boolean                  0                   0
+          b         bit                      {0..1}              1
+          char      character                {0..127}            7
+          8b        8 arbitrary bits (byte)  not applicable      8
+          16b       16 arbitrary bits        not applicable      16
+          n         number (weighted bits)   {-32,768..32,767}   16
+          +n        positive number          {0..32,767}         16
+          u         unsigned number          {0..65,535}         16
+          w         unspecified weighted number
+                    (n or u)                 {-32,768..65,535}   16
+          addr      address (same as u)      {0..65,535}         16
+          32b       32 arbitrary bits        not applicable      32
+          d         double number            {-2,147,483,648..
+                                             2,147,483,647}      32
+          +d        positive double number   {0..2,147,483,647}  32
+          ud        unsigned double number   {0..4,294,967,265}  32
+          wd        unspecified weighted double
+                    number (d or ud)         {-2,147,483,648..
+                                             4,294,967,295}      32
+          sys       0, 1, or more system
+                    dependent stack entries  not applicable      na
+
+          Any other symbol refers to an arbitrary signed 16-bit integer in
+          the range {-32,768..32,767}, unless otherwise noted.
+
+          Because of the use of two's complement arithmetic, the signed 16-
+          bit number (n) -1 has the same bit representation as the unsigned
+          number (u) 65,535.  Both of these numbers are within the set of
+          unspecified weighted numbers (w).  See:  "arithmetic, two's
+          complement"  "number"  "number types"  "stack, data"
+
+
+          11.8 Input Text
+
+          <name>
+
+               An arbitrary FORTH word accepted from the input stream.
+               This notation refers to text from the input stream, not to
+               values on the data stack.  See:  "10.2 General Error
+               Conditions"
+
+          ccc
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         25
+
+
+
+
+
+          11.  GLOSSARY NOTATION
+
+
+               A sequence of arbitrary characters accepted from the input
+               stream until the first occurrence of the specified
+               delimiting character.  The delimiter is accepted from the
+               input stream, but is not one of the characters ccc and is
+               therefore not otherwise processed.  This notation refers to
+               text from the input stream, not to values on the data stack.
+               Unless noted otherwise, the number of characters accepted
+               may be from 0 to 255.  See:  "10.2 General Error Conditions"
+
+
+          11.9 References to other words and definitions
+
+          Glossary definitions may refer to other glossary definitions or
+          to definitions of terms.  Such references are made using the
+          expression "See:".  These references provide additional
+          information which apply as if the information is a portion of the
+          glossary entry using "See:".
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         26
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-12.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-12.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db53814
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-12.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,1188 @@
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+
+
+                               12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+
+          12.1 The Required Word Set Layers
+
+          The words of the Required Word Set are grouped to show like
+          characteristics.  No implementation requirements should be
+          inferred from this grouping.
+
+
+          Nucleus layer
+
+               !  *  */  */MOD  +  +!  -  /  /MOD  0<  0=  0>  1+  1-  2+
+               2-  2/  <  =  >  >R  ?DUP  @  ABS  AND  C!  C@  CMOVE
+               CMOVE>  COUNT  D+  D<  DEPTH  DNEGATE  DROP  DUP  EXECUTE
+               EXIT  FILL  I  J  MAX  MIN  MOD  NEGATE  NOT  OR  OVER  PICK
+               R>  R@  ROLL  ROT  SWAP  U<  UM*  UM/MOD  XOR
+
+
+          Device layer
+
+               BLOCK  BUFFER  CR  EMIT  EXPECT  FLUSH  KEY  SAVE-BUFFERS
+               SPACE  SPACES  TYPE  UPDATE
+
+
+          Interpreter layer
+
+               #  #>  #S  #TIB  '  (  -TRAILING  .  .(  <#  >BODY  >IN
+               ABORT  BASE  BLK  CONVERT  DECIMAL  DEFINITIONS  FIND
+               FORGET  FORTH  FORTH-83  HERE  HOLD  LOAD  PAD  QUIT  SIGN
+               SPAN  TIB  U.  WORD
+
+
+          Compiler layer
+
+               +LOOP  ,  ."  :  ;  ABORT"  ALLOT  BEGIN  COMPILE  CONSTANT
+               CREATE  DO  DOES>  ELSE  IF  IMMEDIATE  LEAVE  LITERAL  LOOP
+               REPEAT  STATE  THEN  UNTIL  VARIABLE  VOCABULARY  WHILE  [
+               [']  [COMPILE]  ]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         27
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          
+
+
+          12.2 The Required Word Set Glossary
+
+          !            16b addr --                   79            "store"
+               16b is stored at addr.
+
+          #            +d1 -- +d2                    79            "sharp"
+               The remainder of +d1 divided by the value of BASE is
+               converted to an ASCII character and appended to the output
+               string toward lower memory addresses.  +d2 is the quotient
+               and is maintained for further processing.  Typically used
+               between <# and #> .
+
+          #>           32b -- addr +n                79    "sharp-greater"
+               Pictured numeric output conversion is ended dropping 32b.
+               addr is the address of the resulting output string.  +n is
+               the number of characters in the output string.  addr and +n
+               together are suitable for TYPE .
+
+          #S           +d -- 0 0                     29          "sharp-s"
+               +d is converted appending each resultant character into the
+               pictured numeric output string until the quotient (see: # )
+               is zero.  A single zero is added to the output string if the
+               number was initially zero.  Typically used between <# and
+               #> .
+
+          #TIB         -- addr                       U,83   "number-t-i-b"
+               The address of a variable containing the number of bytes in
+               the text input buffer.  #TIB is accessed by WORD when BLK is
+               zero.  {{0..capacity of TIB}}  See:  "input stream"
+
+          '            -- addr                       M,83           "tick"
+               Used in the form:
+                       ' <name>
+               addr is the compilation address of <name>.  An error
+               condition exists if <name> is not found in the currently
+               active search order.
+
+          (            --                            I,M,83        "paren"
+                       --   (compiling)
+               Used in the form:
+                       ( ccc)
+               The characters ccc, delimited by ) (closing parenthesis),
+               are considered comments.  Comments are not otherwise
+               processed.  The blank following ( is not part of ccc.  ( may
+               be freely used while interpreting or compiling.  The number
+               of characters in ccc may be zero to the number of characters
+               remaining in the input stream up to the closing parenthesis.
+
+          *            w1 w2 -- w3                   79            "times"
+               w3 is the least-significant 16 bits of the arithmetic
+               product of w1 times w2.
+
+
+
+                                         28
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          */           n1 n2 n3 -- n4                83     "times-divide"
+               n1 is first multiplied by n2 producing an intermediate 32-
+               bit result.  n4 is the floor of the quotient of the
+               intermediate 32-bit result divided by the divisor n3.  The
+               product of n1 times n2 is maintained as an intermediate 32-
+               bit result for greater precision than the otherwise
+               equivalent sequence: n1 n2 * n3 / .  An error condition
+               results if the divisor is zero or if the quotient falls
+               outside of the range {-32,768..32,767}.  See:  "division,
+               floored"
+
+          */MOD        n1 n2 n3 -- n4 n5             83 "times-divide-mod"
+               n1 is first multiplied by n2 producing an intermediate 32-
+               bit result.  n4 is the remainder and n5 is the floor of the
+               quotient of the intermediate 32-bit result divided by the
+               divisor n3.  A 32-bit intermediate product is used as for
+               */ .  n4 has the same sign as n3 or is zero.  An error
+               condition results if the divisor is zero or if the quotient
+               falls outside of the range {-32,768..32,767}.  See:
+               "division, floored"
+
+          +            w1 w2 -- w3                   79             "plus"
+               w3 is the arithmetic sum of w1 plus w2.
+
+          +!           w1 addr --                    79       "plus-store"
+               w1 is added to the w value at addr using the convention for
+               + .  This sum replaces the original value at addr.
+
+          +LOOP        n --                          C,I,83    "plus-loop"
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               n is added to the loop index.  If the new index was
+               incremented across the boundary between limit-1 and limit
+               then the loop is terminated and loop control parameters are
+               discarded.  When the loop is not terminated, execution
+               continues to just after the corresponding DO .  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding DO .  See:  DO
+
+          ,            16b --                        79            "comma"
+               ALLOT space for 16b then store 16b at HERE 2- .
+
+          -            w1 w2 -- w3                   79            "minus"
+               w3 is the result of subtracting w2 from w1.
+
+          -TRAILING    addr +n1 -- addr +n2          79    "dash-trailing"
+               The character count +n1 of a text string beginning at addr
+               is adjusted to exclude trailing spaces.  If +n1 is zero,
+               then +n2 is also zero.  If the entire string consists of
+               spaces, then +n2 is zero.
+
+          .            n --                          M,79            "dot"
+               The absolute value of n is displayed in a free field format
+               with a leading minus sign if n is negative.
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         29
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          ."           --                            C,I,83    "dot-quote"
+                       --   (compiling)              
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       ." ccc"                       
+               Later execution will display the characters ccc up to but
+               not including the delimiting " (close-quote).  The blank
+               following ." is not part of ccc.
+
+          .(           --                            I,M,83    "dos-paren"
+                       --                            (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       .( ccc)                       
+               The characters ccc up to but not including the delimiting )
+               (closing parenthesis) are displayed.  The blank following .(
+               is not part of ccc.
+
+          /            n1 n2 -- n3                   83           "divide"
+               n3 is the floor of the quotient of n1 divided by the divisor
+               n2.  An error condition results if the divisor is zero or if
+               the quotient falls outside of the range {-32,768..32,767}.
+               See:  "division, floored"
+
+          /MOD         n1 n2 -- n3 n4                83       "divide-mod"
+               n3 is the remainder and n4 the floor of the quotient of n1
+               divided by the divisor n2.  n3 has the same sign as n2 or is
+               zero.  An error condition results if the divisor is zero or
+               if the quotient falls outside of the range
+               {-32,768..32,767}.  See:  "division, floored"
+
+          0<           n -- flag                     83        "zero-less"
+               flag is true if n is less than zero (negative).
+
+          0=           w -- flag                     83      "zero-equals"
+               flag is true if w is zero.
+
+          0>           n -- flag                     83     "zero-greater"
+               flag is true if n is greater than zero.
+
+          1+           w1 -- w2                      79         "one-plus"
+               w2 is the result of adding one to w1 according to the
+               operations of + .
+
+          1-           w1 -- w2                      79        "one-minus"
+               w2 is the result of subtracting one from w1 according to the
+               operation of - .
+
+          2+           w1 -- w2                      79         "two-plus"
+               w2 is the result of adding two to w1 according to the
+               operation of + .
+
+          2-           w1 -- w2                      79        "two-minus"
+               w2 is the result of subtracting two from w1 according to the
+               operation of - .
+
+
+
+
+                                         30
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          2/           n1 -- n2                      83       "two-divide"
+               n2 is the result of arithmetically shifting n1 right one
+               bit.  The sign is included in the shift and remains
+               unchanged.
+
+          :            -- sys                        M,79          "colon"
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       : <name> ... ;                
+               Create a word definition for <name> in the compilation
+               vocabulary and set compilation state.  The search order is
+               changed so that the first vocabulary in the search order is
+               changed so that the first vocabulary in the search order is
+               replaced by the compilation vocabulary.  The compilation
+               vocabulary is unchanged.  The text from the input stream is
+               subsequently compiled.  <name> is called a "colon
+               definition".  The newly created word definition for <name>
+               cannot be found in the dictionary until the corresponding ;
+               or ;CODE is successfully processed.   
+               
+               An error condition exists if a word is not found and cannot
+               be converted to a number or if, during compilation from mass
+               storage, the input stream is exhausted before encountering ;
+               or ;CODE .  sys is balanced with its corresponding ; .  See:
+               "compilation"  "9.4 Compilation"
+
+          ;            --                            C,I,79   "semi-colon"
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               Stops compilation of a colon definition, allows the <name>
+               of this colon definition to be found in the dictionary, sets
+               interpret state and compiles EXIT (or a system dependent
+               word which performs an equivalent function).  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding : .  See:  EXIT  :  "stack,
+               return"  "9.4 Compilation"
+
+          <            n1 n2 -- flag                 83        "less-than"
+               flag is true if n1 is less than n2.   
+                       -32678 32767 < must return true.                   
+                       -32768 0 < must return true.
+
+          <#           --                            79       "less-sharp"
+               Initialize pictured numeric output conversion.  The words: 
+                       #  #>  #S  <#  HOLD  SIGN     
+               can be used to specify the conversion of a double number
+               into an ASCII text string stored in right-to-left order.
+
+          =            w1 w2 -- flag                 83           "equals"
+               flag is true if w1 is equal to w2.
+
+          >            n1 n2 -- flag                 83     "greater-than"
+               flag is true if n1 is greater than n2.                     
+                       -32768 32767 > must return false.                  
+                       -32768 0 > must return false.
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         31
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          >BODY        addr1 -- addr2                83          "to-body"
+               addr2 is the parameter field address corresponding to the
+               compilation address addr1.  See:  "9.2 Addressable Memory"
+
+          >IN          -- addr                       U,79          "to-in"
+               The address of a variable which contains the present
+               character offset within the input stream {{0..the number of
+               characters in the input stream}}.  See:  WORD
+
+          >R           16b --                        C,79           "to-r"
+               Transfers 16b to the return stack.  See  "9.3 Return Stack"
+
+          ?DUP         16b -- 16b 16b                79    "question-dupe"
+               or      0 -- 0                        
+               Duplicate 16b if it is non-zero.
+
+          @            addr -- 16b                   79            "fetch"
+               16b is the value at addr.
+
+          ABORT                                      79                   
+               Clears the data stack and performs the function of QUIT .
+               No message is displayed.
+
+          ABORT"       flag --                       C,I,83  "abort-quote"
+                       --   (compiling)              
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       flag ABORT" ccc"              
+               When later executed, if flag is true the characters ccc,
+               delimited by " (close-quote), are displayed and then a
+               system dependent error abort sequence, including the
+               function of ABORT , is performed.  If flag is false, the
+               flag is dropped and execution continues.  The blank
+               following ABORT" is not part of ccc.
+
+          ABS          n -- u                        79         "absolute"
+               u is the absolute value of n.  If n is -32,768 then u is the
+               same value.  See:  "arithmetic, two's complement"
+
+          ALLOT        w --                          79
+               Allocates w bytes in the dictionary.  The address of the
+               next available dictionary entry is updated accordingly.
+
+          AND          16b1 16b2 -- 16b3             79                   
+               16b3 is the bit-by-bit logical 'and' of 16b1 with 16b2.
+
+          BASE         -- addr                       U,83                 
+               The address of a variable containing the current numeric
+               conversion radix.  {{2..72}}
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         32
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          BEGIN        --                            C,I,79               
+                       -- sys   (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       BEGIN ... flag UNTIL          
+               or      
+                       BEGIN ... flag WHILE ... REPEAT                    
+               BEGIN marks the start of a word sequence for repetitive
+               execution.  A BEGIN-UNTIL loop will be repeated until flag
+               is true.  A BEGIN-WHILE-REPEAT will be repeated until flag
+               is false.  The words after UNTIL or REPEAT will be executed
+               when either loop is finished.  sys is balanced with its
+               corresponding UNTIL or WHILE .  See:  "9.9 Control
+               Structures"
+
+          BLK          -- addr                       U,79          "b-l-k"
+               The address of a variable containing the number of the mass
+               storage block being interpreted as the input stream.  If the
+               value of BLK is zero the input stream is taken from the text
+               input buffer.  {{0..the number of blocks available -1}}
+               See:  TIB  "input stream"
+
+          BLOCK        u -- addr                     M,83                 
+               addr is the address of the assigned buffer of the first byte
+               of block u.  If the block occupying that buffer is not block
+               u and has been UPDATEed it is transferred to mass storage
+               before assigning the buffer.  If block u is not already in
+               memory, it is transferred from mass storage into an assigned
+               block buffer.  A block may not be assigned to more than one
+               buffer.  If u is not an available block number, an error
+               condition exists.  Only data within the last buffer
+               referenced by BLOCK or BUFFER is valid.  The contents of a
+               block buffer must not be changed unless the change may be
+               transferred to mass storage.
+
+          BUFFER       u -- addr                     M,83                 
+               Assigns a block buffer to block u.  addr is the address of
+               the first byte of the block within its buffer.  This
+               function is fully specified by the definition for BLOCK
+               except that if the block is not already in memory it might
+               not be transferred from mass storage.  The contents of the
+               block buffer assigned to block u by BUFFER are unspecified.
+
+          C!           16b addr --                   79          "c-store"
+               The least-significant 8 bits of 16b are stored into the byte
+               at addr.
+
+          C@           addr -- 8b                    79          "c-fetch"
+               8b is the contents of the byte at addr.
+
+          CMOVE        addr1 addr2 u --              83           "c-move"
+               Move u bytes beginning at address addr1 to addr2.  The byte
+               at addr1 is moved first, proceeding toward high memory.  If
+               u is zero nothing is moved.
+
+
+
+
+                                         33
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          CMOVE>       addr1 addr2 u --              83        "c-move-up"
+               Move the u bytes at address addr1 to addr2.  The move begins
+               by moving the byte at (addr1 plus u minus 1) to (addr2 plus
+               u minus 1) and proceeds to successively lower addresses for
+               u bytes.  If u is zero nothing is moved.  (Useful for
+               sliding a string towards higher addresses).
+
+          COMPILE      --                            C,83                 
+               Typically used in the form:           
+                       : <name> ... COMPILE <namex> ... ;                 
+               When <name> is executed, the compilation address compiled
+               for <namex> is compiled and not executed.  <name> is
+               typically immediate and <namex> is typically not immediate.
+               See:  "compilation"
+
+          CONSTANT     16b --                        M,83                 
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       16b CONSTANT <name>           
+               Creates a dictionary entry for <name> so that when <name> is
+               later executed, 16b will be left on the stack.
+
+          CONVERT      +d1 addr1 -- +d2 addr2        79                   
+               +d2 is the result of converting the characters within the
+               text beginning at addr1+2 into digits, using the value of
+               BASE , and accumulating each into +d1 after multiplying +d1
+               by the value of BASE .  Conversion continues until an
+               unconvertible character is encounter.  addr2 is the location
+               of the first unconvertible character.
+
+          COUNT        addr1 -- addr2 +n             79                   
+               addr2 is addr1+1 and +n is the length of the counted string
+               at addr1.  The byte at addr1 contains the byte count +n.
+               Range of +n is {0.255}  See:  "string, counted"
+
+          CR           --                            M,79            "c-r"
+               Displays a carriage-return and line-feed or equivalent
+               operation.
+
+          CREATE       --                            M,79                 
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       CREATE <name>                 
+               Creates a dictionary entry for <name>.  After <name> is
+               created, the next available dictionary location is the first
+               byte of <name>'s parameter field.  When <name> is
+               subsequently executed, the address of the first byte of
+               <name>'s parameter field is left on the stack.  CREATE does
+               not allocate space in <name>'s parameter field.
+
+          D+           wd1 wd2 -- wd3                79           "d-plus"
+               wd3 is the arithmetic sum of wd1 plus wd2.
+
+          D<           d1 d2 -- flag                 83      "d-less-than"
+               flag is true if d1 is less than d2 according to the
+               operation of < except extended to 32 bits.
+
+
+
+                                         34
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          DECIMAL      --                            79                   
+               Set the input-output numeric conversion base to ten.
+
+          DEFINITIONS  --                            79                   
+               The compilation vocabulary is changed to be the same as the
+               first vocabulary in the search order.  See:  "vocabulary,
+               compilation"
+
+          DEPTH        -- +n                         79                   
+               +n is the number of 16-bit values contained in the data
+               stack before +n was placed on the stack.
+
+          DNEGATE      d1 -- d2                      79         "d-negate"
+               d2 is the two's complement of d1.
+
+          DO           w1 w2 --                      C,I,83               
+                       -- sys   (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       DO ... LOOP                   
+               or      
+                       DO ... +LOOP                  
+               Begins a loop which terminates based on control parameters.
+               The loop index begins at w2, and terminates based on the
+               limit w1.  See LOOP and +LOOP for details on how the loop is
+               terminated.  The loop is always executed at least once.  For
+               example: w DUP DO ... LOOP executes 65,536 times.  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding LOOP or +LOOP .  See:  "9.9
+               Control Structures"
+               
+               An error condition exists if insufficient space is available
+               for at least three nesting levels.
+
+          DOES>        -- addr                       C,I,83         "does"
+                       --   (compiling)              
+               Defines the execution-time action of a word created by a
+               high-level defining word.  Used in the form:               
+                       : <namex> ... <create> ... DOES> ... ;             
+               and then                              
+                       <namex> <name>                
+               where <create> is CREATE or any user defined word which
+               executes CREATE .                     
+               
+               Marks the termination of the defining part of the defining
+               word <namex> and then begins the definition of the
+               execution-time action for words that will later be defined
+               by <namex>.  When <name> is later executed, the address of
+               <name>'s parameter field is placed on the stack and then the
+               sequence of words between DOES> and ; are executed.
+
+          DROP         16b --                        79                   
+               16b is removed from the stack.
+
+          DUP          16b -- 16b 16b                79             "dupe"
+               Duplicate 16b.
+
+
+
+                                         35
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          ELSE         --                            C,I,79               
+                       sys1 -- sys2   (compiling)    
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       flag IF ... ELSE ... THEN     
+               ELSE executes after the true part following IF .  ELSE
+               forces execution to continue at just after THEN .  sys1 is
+               balanced with its corresponding IF .  sys2 is balanced with
+               its corresponding THEN .  See:  IF  THEN
+
+          EMIT         16b --                        M,83                 
+               The least-significant 7-bit ASCII character is displayed.
+               SEE:  "9.5.3 EMIT"
+
+          EXECUTE      addr --                       79
+               The word definition indicated by addr is executed.  An error
+               condition exists if addr is not a compilation address
+
+          EXIT         --                            C,79                 
+               Compiled within a colon definition such that when executed,
+               that colon definition returns control to the definition that
+               passed control to it by returning control to the return
+               point on the top of the return stack.  An error condition
+               exists if the top of the return stack does not contain a
+               valid return point.  May not be used within a do-loop.  See:
+               ;  "stack, return"  "9.3 Return Stack"
+
+          EXPECT       addr +n --                    M,83                 
+               Receive characters and store each into memory.  The transfer
+               begins at addr proceeding towards higher addresses one byte
+               per character until either a "return" is received or until
+               +n characters have been transferred.  No more than +n
+               characters will be stored.  The "return" is not stored into
+               memory.  No characters are received or transferred if +n is
+               zero.  All characters actually received and stored into
+               memory will be displayed, with the "return" displaying as a
+               space.  See:  SPAN  "9.5.2 EXPECT"
+
+          FILL         addr u 8b --                  83                   
+               u bytes of memory beginning at addr are set to 8b.  No
+               action is taken if u is zero.
+
+          FIND         addr1 -- addr2 n              83                   
+               addr1 is the address of a counted string.  The string
+               contains a word name to be located in the currently active
+               search order.  If the word is not found, addr2 is the string
+               address addr1, and n is zero.  If the word is found, addr2
+               is the compilation address and n is set to one of two non-
+               zero values.  If the word found has the immediate attribute,
+               n is set to one.  If the word is non-immediate, n is set to
+               minus one (true).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         36
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          FLUSH        --                            M,83                 
+               Performs the function of SAVE-BUFFERS then unassigns all
+               block buffers.  (This may be useful for mounting or changing
+               mass storage media).
+
+          FORGET       --                            M,83                 
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       FORGET <name>                 
+               If <name> is found in the compilation vocabulary, delete
+               <name> from the dictionary and all words added to the
+               dictionary after <name> regardless of their vocabulary.
+               Failure to find <name> is an error condition.  An error
+               condition also exists if the compilation vocabulary is
+               deleted.  See:  "10.2 General Error Conditions"
+
+          FORTH        --                            83                   
+               The name of the primary vocabulary.  Execution replaces the
+               first vocabulary in the search order with FORTH .  FORTH is
+               initially the compilation vocabulary and the first
+               vocabulary in the search order.  New definitions become part
+               of the FORTH vocabulary until a different compilation
+               vocabulary is established.  See:  VOCABULARY
+
+          FORTH-83     --                            83                   
+               Assures that a FORTH-83 Standard System is available,
+               otherwise an error condition exists.
+
+          HERE         -- addr                       79
+               The address of the next available dictionary location.
+
+          HOLD         char --                       79
+               char is inserted into a pictured numeric output string.
+               Typically used between <# and #>.
+
+          I            -- w                          C,79                 
+               w is a copy of the loop index.  May only be used in the
+               form:   
+                       DO ... I ... LOOP             
+               or      
+                       DO ... I ... +LOOP
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         37
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          IF           flag --                       C,I,79               
+                       -- sys   (compiling)
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       flag IF ... ELSE ... THEN     
+               or      
+                       flag IF ... THEN              
+               If flag is true, the words following IF are executed and the
+               words following ELSE until just after THEN are skipped.  The
+               ELSE part is optional.                
+               
+               If flag is false, the words from IF through ELSE , or from
+               IF through THEN (when no ELSE is used), are skipped.  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding ELSE or THEN .  See:  "9.9
+               Control Structures"
+
+          IMMEDIATE    --                            79                   
+               Marks the most recently created dictionary entry as a word
+               which will be executed when encountered during compilation
+               rather than compiled.
+
+          J            -- w                          C,79                 
+               w is a copy of the index of the next outer loop.  May only
+               be used within a nested DO-LOOP or DO-+LOOP in the form, for
+               example:                              
+                       DO ... DO ... J ... LOOP ... +LOOP
+
+          KEY          -- 16b                        M,83                 
+               The least-significant 7 bits of 16b is the next ASCII
+               character received.  All valid ASCII characters can be
+               received.  Control characters are not processed by the
+               system for any editing purpose.  Characters received by KEY
+               will not be displayed.  See:  "9.5.1 KEY"
+
+          LEAVE        --                            C,I,83               
+                       --   (compiling)              
+               Transfers execution to just beyond the next LOOP or +LOOP .
+               The loop is terminated and loop control parameters are
+               discarded.  May only be used in the form:                  
+                       DO ... LEAVE ... LOOP         
+               or      
+                       DO ... LEAVE ... +LOOP        
+               LEAVE may appear within other control structures which are
+               nested within the do-loop structure.  More than one LEAVE
+               may appear within a do-loop.  See:  "9.3 Return Stack"
+
+          LITERAL      -- 16b                        C,I,79               
+                       16b --   (compiling)          
+               Typically used in the form:           
+                       [ 16b ] LITERAL               
+               Compiles a system dependent operation so that when later
+               executed, 16b will be left on the stack.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         38
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          LOAD         u --                          M,79                 
+               The contents of >IN and BLK , which locate the current input
+               stream, are saved.  The input stream is then redirected to
+               the beginning of screen u by setting >IN to zero and BLK to
+               u.  The screen is then interpreted.  If interpretation from
+               screen u is not terminated explicitly it will be terminated
+               when the input stream is exhausted and then the contents of
+               >IN and BLK will be restored.  An error condition exists if
+               u is zero.  See:  >IN  BLK  BLOCK
+
+          LOOP         --                            C,I,83               
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               Increments the DO-LOOP index by one.  If the new index was
+               incremented across the boundary between limit-1 and limit
+               the loop is terminated and loop control parameters are
+               discarded.  When the loop is not terminated, execution
+               continues to just after the corresponding DO .  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding DO .  See:  DO
+
+          MAX          n1 n2 -- n3                   79              "max"
+               n3 is the greater of n1 and n2 according to the operation of
+               > .
+
+          MIN          n1 n2 -- n3                   79              "min"
+               n3 is the lesser of n1 and n2 according to the operation of
+               < .
+
+          MOD          n1 n2 -- n3                   83                   
+               n3 is the remainder after dividing n1 by the divisor n2.  n3
+               has the same sign as n2 or is zero.  An error condition
+               results if the divisor is zero or if the quotient falls
+               outside of the range {-32,768..32,767}.  See:  "division,
+               floored"
+
+          NEGATE       n1 -- n2                      79                   
+               n2 is the two's complement of n1, i.e, the difference of
+               zero less n1.
+
+          NOT          16b1 -- 16b2                  83                   
+               16b2 is the one's complement of 16b1.
+
+          OR           16b1 16b2 -- 16b3             79                   
+               16b3 is the bit-by-bit inclusive-or of 16b1 with 16b2.
+
+          OVER         16b1 16b2 -- 16b1 16b2 16b3   79                   
+               16b3 is a copy of 16b1.
+
+          PAD          -- addr                       83                   
+               The lower address of a scratch area used to hold data for
+               intermediate processing.  The address or contents of PAD may
+               change and the data lost if the address of the next
+               available dictionary location is changed.  The minimum
+               capacity of PAD is 84 characters.
+
+
+
+
+                                         39
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          PICK         +n -- 16b                     83                   
+               16b is a copy of the +nth stack value, not counting +n
+               itself.  {0..the number of elements on stack-1}            
+                       0 PICK is equivalent to DUP   
+                       1 PICK is equivalent to OVER
+
+          QUIT         --                            79                   
+               Clears the return stack, sets interpret state, accepts new
+               input from the current input device, and begins text
+               interpretation.  No message is displayed.
+
+          R>           -- 16b                        C,79         "r-from"
+               16b is removed from the return stack and transferred to the
+               data stack.  See:  "9.3 Return Stack"
+
+          R@           -- 16b                        C,79        "r-fetch"
+               16b is a copy of the top of the return stack.
+
+          REPEAT       --                            C,I,79               
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       BEGIN ... flag WHILE ... REPEAT                    
+               At execution time, REPEAT continues execution to just after
+               the corresponding BEGIN .  sys is balanced with its
+               corresponding WHILE .  See:  BEGIN
+
+          ROLL         +n --                         83                   
+               The +nth stack value, not counting +n itself is first
+               removed and then transferred to the top of the stack, moving
+               the remaining values into the vacated position.  {0..the
+               number of elements on the stack-1}    
+                       2 ROLL is equivalent to ROT   
+                       0 ROLL is a null operation
+
+          ROT          16b1 16b2 16b3 -- 16b2 16b3 16b1  79         "rote"
+               The top three stack entries are rotated, bringing the
+               deepest to the top.
+
+          SAVE-BUFFERS --                            M,79   "save-buffers"
+               The contents of all block buffers marked as UPDATEed are
+               written to their corresponding mass storage blocks.  All
+               buffers are marked as no longer being modified, but may
+               remain assigned.
+
+          SIGN         n --                          83                   
+               If n is negative, an ASCII "-" (minus sign) is appended to
+               the pictured numeric output string.  Typically used between
+               <# and #> .
+
+          SPACE        --                            M,79                 
+               Displays an ASCII space.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         40
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          SPACES       +n --                         M,79                 
+               Displays +n ASCII spaces.  Nothing is displayed if +n is
+               zero.
+
+          SPAN         -- addr                       U,83                 
+               The address of a variable containing the count of characters
+               actually received and stored by the last execution of
+               EXPECT .  See:  EXPECT
+
+          STATE        -- addr                       U,79                 
+               The address of a variable containing the compilation state.
+               A non-zero content indicates compilation is occurring, but
+               the value itself is system dependent.  A Standard Program
+               may not modify this variable.
+
+          SWAP         16b1 16b2 -- 16b2 16b1        79                   
+               The top two stack entries are exchanged.
+
+          THEN         --                            C,I,79               
+                       sys --   (compiling)
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       flag IF ... ELSE ... THEN     
+               or      
+                       flag IF ... THEN              
+               THEN is the point where execution continues after ELSE , or
+               IF when no ELSE is present.  sys is balanced with its
+               corresponding IF or ELSE .  See:  IF  ELSE
+
+          TIB          -- addr                       83            "t-i-b"
+               The address of the text input buffer.  This buffer is used
+               to hold characters when the input stream is coming from the
+               current input device.  The minimum capacity of TIB is 80
+               characters.
+
+          TYPE         addr +n --                    M,79                 
+               +n characters are displayed from memory beginning with the
+               character at addr and continuing through consecutive
+               addresses.  Nothing is displayed if +n is zero.  See:
+               "9.5.4 TYPE"
+
+          U.           u --                          M,79          "u-dot"
+               u is displayed as an unsigned number in a free-field format.
+
+          U<           u1 u2 -- flag                 83      "u-less-than"
+               flag is true if u1 is less than u2.
+
+          UM*          u1 u2 -- ud                   83        "u-m-times"
+               ud is the unsigned product of u1 times u2.  All values and
+               arithmetic are unsigned.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         41
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          UM/MOD       ud u1 -- u2 u3                83   "u-m-divide-mod"
+               u2 is the remainder and u3 is the floor of the quotient
+               after dividing ud by the divisor u1.  All values and
+               arithmetic are unsigned.  An error condition results if the
+               divisor is zero or if the quotient lies outside the range
+               {0..65,535}.  See:  "floor, arithmetic"
+
+          UNTIL        flag --                       C,I,79               
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       BEGIN ... flag UNTIL          
+               Marks the end of a BEGIN-UNTIL loop which will terminate
+               based on flag.  If flag is true, the loop is terminated.  If
+               flag is false, execution continues to just after the
+               corresponding BEGIN .  sys is balanced with its
+               corresponding BEGIN .  See:  BEGIN
+
+          UPDATE       --                            79                   
+               The currently valid block buffer is marked as modified.
+               Blocks marked as modified will subsequently be automatically
+               transferred to mass storage should its memory buffer be
+               needed for storage of a different block or upon execution of
+               FLUSH or SAVE-BUFFERS .
+
+          VARIABLE     --                            M,79                 
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       VARIABLE <name>               
+               A dictionary entry for <name> is created and two bytes are
+               ALLOTted in its parameter field.  This parameter field is to
+               be used for contents of the variable.  The application is
+               responsible for initializing the contents of the variable
+               which it creates.  When <name> is later executed, the
+               address of its parameter field is placed on the stack.
+
+          VOCABULARY   --                            M,83                 
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       VOCABULARY <name>             
+               A dictionary entry for <name> is created which specifies a
+               new ordered list of word definitions.  Subsequent execution
+               of <name> replaces the first vocabulary in the search order
+               with <name>.  When <name> becomes the compilation vocabulary
+               new definitions will be appended to <name>'s list.     See:
+               DEFINITIONS  "search order"
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         42
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          WHILE        flag --                       C,I,79               
+                       sys1 -- sys2   (compiling)    
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       BEGIN ... flag WHILE ... REPEAT                    
+               Selects conditional execution based on flag.  When flag is
+               true, execution continues to just after the WHILE through to
+               the REPEAT which then continues execution back to just after
+               the BEGIN .  When flag is false, execution continues to just
+               after the REPEAT , exiting the control structure.  sys1 is
+               balanced with its corresponding BEGIN .  sys2 is balanced
+               with its corresponding REPEAT .  See:  BEGIN
+
+          WORD         char -- addr                  M,83                 
+               Generates a counted string by non-destructively accepting
+               characters from the input stream until the delimiting
+               character char is encountered or the input stream is
+               exhausted.  Leading delimiters are ignored.  The entire
+               character string is stored in memory beginning at addr as a
+               sequence of bytes.  The string is followed by a blank which
+               is not included in the count.  The first byte of the string
+               is the number of characters {0..255}.  If the string is
+               longer than 255 characters, the count is unspecified.  If
+               the input stream is already exhausted as WORD is called,
+               then a zero length character string will result.           
+               
+               If the delimiter is not found the value of >IN is the size
+               of the input stream.  If the delimiter is found >IN is
+               adjusted to indicate the offset to the character following
+               the delimiter.  #TIB is unmodified.   
+               
+               The counted string returned by WORD may reside in the "free"
+               dictionary area at HERE or above.  Note that the text
+               interpreter may also use this area.  See:  "input stream"
+
+          XOR          16b1 16b2 -- 16b3             79             "x-or"
+               16b3 is the bit-by-bit exclusive-or of 16b1 with 16b2.
+
+          [            --                            I,79   "left-bracket"
+                       --   (compiling)              
+               Sets interpret state.  The text from the input stream is
+               subsequently interpreted.  For typical usage see LITERAL .
+               See:  ]
+
+          [']          -- addr                       C,I,M,83    "bracket-
+                       --   (compiling)                              tick"
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       ['] <name>                    
+               Compiles the compilation address addr of <name> as a
+               literal.  When the colon definition is later executed addr
+               is left on the stack.  An error condition exists if <name>
+               is not found in the currently active search order.  See:
+               LITERAL
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         43
+
+
+
+
+
+          12.  REQUIRED WORD SET
+
+
+          [COMPILE]    --                            C,I,M,79    "bracket-
+                       --   (compiling)                           compile"
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       [COMPILE] <name>              
+               Forces compilation of the following word <name>.  This
+               allows compilation of an immediate word when it would
+               otherwise have been executed.
+
+          ]            --                            79    "right-bracket"
+               Sets compilation state.  The text from the input stream is
+               subsequently compiled.  For typical usage see LITERAL .
+               See:  [
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         44
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-13.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-13.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5bf8332
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-13.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+
+
+
+
+          13.  DOUBLE NUMBER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+
+                        13.  DOUBLE NUMBER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+          13.1 The Double Number Extension Word Set Layers
+
+
+          Nucleus layer
+
+               2!  2@  2DROP  2DUP  2OVER  2ROT  2SWAP  D+  D-  D0=  D2/
+               D<  D=  DABS  DMAX  DMIN  DNEGATE  DU<
+
+
+          Device layer
+
+               none
+
+
+          Interpreter layer
+
+               D.  D.R
+
+
+          Compiler layer
+
+               2CONSTANT  2VARIABLE
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         45
+
+
+
+
+
+          13.  DOUBLE NUMBER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+          
+
+
+          13.2 The Double Number Extension Word Set Glossary
+
+          2!           32b addr --                   79        "two-store"
+               32b is stored at addr.  See:  "number"
+
+          2@           addr -- 32b                   79        "two-fetch"
+               32b is the value at addr.  See:  "number"
+
+          2CONSTANT    32b --                        M,83   "two-constant"
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       32b 2CONSTANT <name>          
+               Creates a dictionary entry for <name> so that when <name> is
+               later executed, 32b will be left on the stack.
+
+          2DROP        32b --                        79         "two-drop"
+               32b is removed from the stack.
+
+          2DUP         32b -- 32b 32b                79         "two-dupe"
+               Duplicate 32b.
+
+          2OVER        32b1 32b2 -- 32b1 32b2 32b3   79         "two-over"
+               32b3 is a copy of 32b1.
+
+          2ROT         32b1 32b2 32b3 -- 32b2 32b3 32b1  79     "two-rote"
+               The top three double numbers on the stack are rotated,
+               bringing the third double number number to the top of the
+               stack.
+
+          2SWAP        32b1 32b2 -- 32b2 32b1        79         "two-swap"
+               The top two double numbers are exchanged.
+
+          2VARIABLE    --                            M,79   "two-variable"
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       2VARIABLE <name>              
+               A dictionary entry for <name> is created and four bytes are
+               ALLOTted in its parameter field.  This parameter field is to
+               be used for contents of the variable.  The application is
+               responsible for initializing the contents of the variable
+               which it creates.  When <name> is later executed, the
+               address of its parameter field is placed on the stack.  See:
+               VARIABLE
+
+          D+           wd1 wd2 -- wd3                79                   
+               See the complete definition in the Required Word Set.
+
+          D-           wd1 wd2 -- wd3                79          "d-minus"
+               wd3 is the result of subtracting wd2 from wd1.
+
+          D.           d --                          M,79          "d-dot"
+               The absolute value of d is displayed in a free field format.
+               A leading negative sign is displayed if d is negative.
+
+
+
+                                         46
+
+
+
+
+
+          13.  DOUBLE NUMBER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+          D.R          d +n --                       M,83        "d-dot-r"
+               d is converted using the value of BASE and then displayed
+               right aligned in a field +n characters wide.  A leading
+               minus sign is displayed if d is negative.  If the number of
+               characters required to display d is greater than +n, an
+               error condition exists.  See:  "number conversion"
+
+          D0=          wd -- flag                    83    "d-zero-equals"
+               flag is true if wd is zero.
+
+          D2/          d1 -- d2                      83     "d-two-divide"
+               d2 is the result of d1 arithmetically shifted right one bit.
+               The sign is included in the shift and remains unchanged.
+
+          D<           d1 d2 -- flag                 83                   
+               See the complete definition in the Required Word Set.
+
+          D=           wd1 wd2 -- flag               83          "d-equal"
+               flag is true if wd1 equals wd2.
+
+          DABS         d -- ud                       79       "d-absolute"
+               ud is the absolute value of d.  If d is -2,147,483,648 then
+               ud is the same value.  See:  "arithmetic, two's complement"
+
+          DMAX         d1 d2 -- d3                   79            "d-max"
+               d3 is the greater of d1 and d2.
+
+          DMIN         d1 d2 -- d3                   79            "d-min"
+               d3 is the lesser of d1 and d2.
+
+          DNEGATE      d1 -- d2                      79                   
+               See the complete definition in the Required Word Set.
+
+          DU<          ud1 ud2 -- flag               83         "d-u-less"
+               flag is true if ud1 is less than ud2.  Both numbers are
+               unsigned.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         47
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-14.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-14.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51a79e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-14.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+
+
+
+
+          14.  ASSEMBLER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+
+                          14.  ASSEMBLER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+          14.1 The Assembler Extension Word Set Layers
+
+
+          Nucleus layer
+
+               none
+
+
+          Device layer
+
+               none
+
+
+          Interpreter layer
+
+               ASSEMBLER
+
+
+          Compiler layer
+
+               ;CODE  CODE  END-CODE
+
+
+          14.2 Assembler Extension Word Set Usage
+
+          Because of the system dependent nature of machine language
+          programming, a Standard Program cannot use CODE or ;CODE .
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         48
+
+
+
+
+
+          14.  ASSEMBLER EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+          
+
+
+          14.3 The Assembler Extension Word Set Glossary
+
+          ;CODE        --                            C,I,79   "semi-colon-
+                       sys1 -- sys2                  (compiling)     code"
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       : <namex> ... <create> ... ;CODE ... END-CODE      
+               Stops compilation, terminates the defining word <namex> and
+               executes ASSEMBLER.  When <namex> is executed in the form: 
+                       <namex> <name>                
+               to define the new <name>, the execution address of <name>
+               will contain the address of the code sequence following the
+               ;CODE in <namex>.  Execution of any <name> will cause this
+               machine code sequence to be executed.  sys1 is balanced with
+               its corresponding : .  sys2 is balanced with its
+               corresponding END-CODE .  See:  CODE  DOES>
+
+          ASSEMBLER    --                            83                   
+               Execution replaces the first vocabulary in the search order
+               with the ASSEMBLER vocabulary.  See:  VOCABULARY
+
+          CODE         -- sys                        M,83                 
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       CODE <name> ... END-CODE      
+               Creates a dictionary entry for <name> to be defined by a
+               following sequence of assembly language words.  Words thus
+               defined are called code definitions.  This newly created
+               word definition for <name> cannot be found in the dictionary
+               until the corresponding END-CODE is successfully processed
+               (see:  END-CODE ).  Executes ASSEMBLER .  sys is balanced
+               with its corresponding END-CODE .
+
+          END-CODE     sys --                        79         "end-code"
+               Terminates a code definition and allows the <name> of the
+               corresponding code definition to be found in the dictionary.
+               sys is balanced with its corresponding CODE or ;CODE .  See:
+               CODE
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         49
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-15.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-15.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b91bd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-15.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+
+
+
+
+          15.  THE SYSTEM EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+
+                         15.  THE SYSTEM EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+
+          15.1 The System Extension Word Set Layers
+
+
+          Nucleus layer
+
+               BRANCH  ?BRANCH
+
+
+          Device layer
+
+               none
+
+
+          Interpreter layer
+
+               CONTEXT  CURRENT
+
+
+          Compiler layer
+
+               <MARK  <RESOLVE  >MARK  >RESOLVE
+
+
+          15.2 System Extension Word Set Usage
+
+          After BRANCH or ?BRANCH is compiled, >MARK or <RESOLVE is
+          executed.  The addr left by >MARK is passed to >RESOLVE .  The
+          addr left by <MARK is passed to <RESOLVE .  For example:    
+               : IF     COMPILE ?BRANCH  >MARK  ; IMMEDIATE 
+               : THEN   >RESOLVE  ; IMMEDIATE
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         50
+
+
+
+
+
+          15.  THE SYSTEM EXTENSION WORD SET
+
+
+          
+
+
+          15.3 The System Extension Word Set Glossary
+
+          <MARK        -- addr                       C,83  "backward-mark"
+               Used at the destination of a backward branch.  addr is
+               typically only used by <RESOLVE to compile a branch address.
+
+          <RESOLVE     addr --                       C,83"backward-resolve"
+               Used at the source of a backward branch after either BRANCH
+               or ?BRANCH .  Compiles a branch address using addr as the
+               destination address.
+
+          >MARK        -- addr                       C,83   "forward-mark"
+               Used at the source of a forward branch.  Typically used
+               after either BRANCH or ?BRANCH .  Compiles space in the
+               dictionary for a branch address which will later be resolved
+               by >RESOLVE .
+
+          >RESOLVE     addr --                       C,83"forward-resolve"
+               Used at the destination of a forward branch.  Calculates the
+               branch address (to the current location in the dictionary)
+               using addr and places this branch address into the space
+               left by >MARK .
+
+          ?BRANCH      flag --                       C,83"question-branch"
+               When used in the form:  COMPILE ?BRANCH  a conditional
+               branch operation is compiled.  See BRANCH for further
+               details.  When executed, if flag is false the branch is
+               performed as with BRANCH .  When flag is true execution
+               continues at the compilation address immediately following
+               the branch address.
+
+          BRANCH       --                            C,83                 
+               When used in the form:  COMPILE BRANCH  an unconditional
+               branch operation is compiled.  A branch address must be
+               compiled immediately following this compilation address.
+               The branch address is typically generated by following
+               BRANCH with <RESOLVE or >MARK .
+
+          CONTEXT      -- addr                       U,79                 
+               The address of a variable which determines the dictionary
+               search order.
+
+          CURRENT      -- addr                       U,79                 
+               The address of a variable specifying the vocabulary in which
+               new word definitions are appended.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         51
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-16.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-16.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..88c7f4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-16.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+
+
+
+
+          16.  CONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+
+
+                           16.  CONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          The Controlled Reference Words are word definitions which,
+          although not required, cannot be present with a non-standard
+          definition in the vocabulary FORTH of a Standard System.  These
+          words have present usage and/or are candidates for future
+          standardization.
+
+          -->          --                            I,M,79   "next-block"
+                       --                            (compilation)        
+               Continue interpretation on the next sequential block.  May
+               be used within a colon definition that crosses a block
+               boundary.
+
+          .R           n +n --                       M,83          "dot-r"
+               n is converted using BASE and then displayed right aligned
+               in a field +n characters wide.  A leading minus sign is
+               displayed if n is negative.  If the number of characters
+               required to display n is greater than +n, an error condition
+               exists.  See:  "number conversion"
+
+          2*           w1 -- w2                      83        "two-times"
+               w2 is the result of shifting w1 left one bit.  A zero is
+               shifted into the vacated bit position.
+
+          BL           -- 32                         79              "b-l"
+               Leave the ASCII character value for space (decimal 32).
+
+          BLANK        addr u --                     83                   
+               u bytes of memory beginning at addr are set to the ASCII
+               character value for space.  No action is taken if u is zero.
+
+          C,           16b --                        83          "c-comma"
+               ALLOT one byte then store the least-significant 8 bits of
+               16b at HERE 1- .
+
+          DUMP         addr u --                     M,79                 
+               List the contents of u addresses starting at addr.  Each
+               line of values may be preceded by the address of the first
+               value.
+
+          EDITOR       --                            83                   
+               Execution replaces the first vocabulary in the search order
+               with the EDITOR vocabulary.  See:  VOCABULARY
+
+          EMPTY-BUFFERS --                           M,79  "empty-buffers"
+               Unassign all block buffers.  UPDATEed blocks are not written
+               to mass storage.  See:  BLOCK
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         52
+
+
+
+
+
+          16.  CONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          END          flag --                       C,I,79               
+                       sys --                        (compiling)          
+               A synonym for UNTIL .
+
+          ERASE        addr u --                     79
+               u bytes of memory beginning at addr are set to zero.  No
+               action is taken if u is zero.
+
+          HEX          --                            29
+               Set the numeric input-output conversion base to sixteen.
+
+          INTERPRET    --                            M,83                 
+               Begin text interpretation at the character indexed by the
+               contents of >IN relative to the block number contained in
+               BLK , continuing until the input stream is exhausted.  If
+               BLK contains zero, interpret characters from the text input
+               buffer.  See:  "input stream"
+
+          K            -- w                          C,83                 
+               w is a copy of the index of the second outer loop.  May only
+               be used within a nested DO-LOOP or DO-+LOOP in the form, for
+               example:                              
+                       DO ... DO ... DO ... K ... LOOP ... +LOOP ... LOOP
+
+          LIST         u --                          M,79                 
+               The contents of screen u are displayed.  SCR is set to u.
+               See:  BLOCK
+
+          OCTAL        --                            83                   
+               Set the numeric input-output conversion base to eight.
+
+          OFFSET       -- addr                       U,83                 
+               The address of a variable that contains the offset added to
+               the block number on the stack by BLOCK or BUFFER to
+               determine the actual physical block number.
+
+          QUERY        --                            M,83                 
+               Characters are received and transferred into the memory area
+               addressed by TIB .  The transfer terminates when either a
+               "return" is received or the number of characters transferred
+               reaches the size of the area addressed by TIB .  The values
+               of >IN and BLK are set to zero and the value of #TIB is set
+               to the value of SPAN .  WORD may be used to accept text from
+               this buffer.  See:  EXPECT  "input stream"
+
+          RECURSE      --                            C,I,83               
+                       --                            (compiling)          
+               Compile the compilation address of the definition being
+               compiled to cause the definition to later be executed
+               recursively.
+
+          SCR          -- addr                       U,79          "s-c-r"
+               The address of a variable containing the number of the
+               screen most recently LISTed.
+
+
+
+                                         53
+
+
+
+
+
+          16.  CONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          SP@          -- addr                       79        "s-p-fetch"
+               addr is the address of the top of the stack just before SP@
+               was executed.
+
+          THRU         u1 u2 --                      M,83                 
+               Load consecutively the blocks from u1 through u2.
+
+          U.R          u +n --                       M,83        "u-dot-r"
+               u is converted using the value of BASE and then displayed as
+               an unsigned number right aligned in a field +n characters
+               wide.  If the number of characters required to display u is
+               greater than +n, an error condition exists.  See:  "number
+               conversion"
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         54
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-2.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47f9a33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+
+
+          2.   PURPOSE
+
+
+
+
+                                    2.   PURPOSE
+
+
+          The purpose of this standard is to allow transportability of
+          FORTH-83 Standard Programs in source form among FORTH-83 Standard
+          Systems.  A standard program shall execute equivalently on all
+          standard systems.
+
+
+
+                                     3.   SCOPE
+
+
+          This standard shall apply to any FORTH-83 Standard Program
+          executing on any FORTH-83 Standard System, provided sufficient
+          computer resources (memory, mass storage) are available.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          2
+
+          
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-3.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-3.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47f9a33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-3.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+
+
+          2.   PURPOSE
+
+
+
+
+                                    2.   PURPOSE
+
+
+          The purpose of this standard is to allow transportability of
+          FORTH-83 Standard Programs in source form among FORTH-83 Standard
+          Systems.  A standard program shall execute equivalently on all
+          standard systems.
+
+
+
+                                     3.   SCOPE
+
+
+          This standard shall apply to any FORTH-83 Standard Program
+          executing on any FORTH-83 Standard System, provided sufficient
+          computer resources (memory, mass storage) are available.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          2
+
+          
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-4.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-4.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45e91a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-4.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+
+
+
+
+          4.   TRADEOFFS
+
+
+
+
+                                   4.   TRADEOFFS
+
+
+          When conflicting choices are made, the following order guides the
+          Standards Team:
+
+          1)   Functional correctness - known bounds, non-ambiguous;
+
+          2)   Portability - repeatable results when programs are
+               transported among Standard Systems;
+
+          3)   Simplicity;
+
+          4)   Naming clarity - uniformity of expression using descriptive
+               rather than procedure names, i.e., [COMPILE] rather than 'C,
+               and ALLOT rather than DP+! ;
+
+          5)   Generality;
+
+          6)   Execution speed;
+
+          7)   Memory compactness;
+
+          8)   Compilation speed;
+
+          9)   Historical continuity;
+
+          10)  Pronounceability;
+
+          11)  Teachability.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          3
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-5.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-5.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9022b00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-5.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,596 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+
+
+
+                              5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+          These are the definitions of the terms used within this Standard.
+
+          address, byte
+               An unsigned 16-bit number that locates an 8-bit byte in a
+               standard FORTH address space over the range {0..65,535}.  It
+               may be a native machine address or a representation on a
+               virtual machine, locating the addr-th byte within the
+               virtual byte address space.  Addresses are treated as
+               unsigned numbers.  See:  "arithmetic, two's complement"
+
+          address, compilation
+               The numerical value compiled for a FORTH word definition
+               which identifies that definition.  The address interpreter
+               uses this value to locate the machine code corresponding to
+               each definition.
+
+          address, native machine
+               The natural address representation of the host computer.
+
+          address, parameter field
+               The address of the first byte of memory associated with a
+               word definition for the storage of compilation addresses (in
+               a colon definition), numeric data, text characters, etc.
+
+          arithmetic, two's complement
+               Arithmetic is performed using two's complement integers
+               within a field of either 16 or 32 bits as indicated by the
+               operation.  Addition and subtraction of two's complement
+               integers ignore any overflow condition.  This allows numbers
+               treated as unsigned to produce the same results as if the
+               numbers had been treated as signed.
+
+          block
+               The 1024 bytes of data from mass storage which are
+               referenced by block numbers in the range {0..the number of
+               blocks available -1}.  The actual amount of data transferred
+               and the translation from block number to device and physical
+               record is a function of the implementation.  See:  "block
+               buffer"  "mass storage"
+
+          block buffer
+               A 1024-byte memory area where a block is made temporarily
+               available for use.  Block buffers are uniquely assigned to
+               blocks.  See:  "9.7 Multiprogramming Impact"
+
+          byte
+               An assembly of 8 bits.  In reference to memory, it is the
+               storage capacity for 8 bits.
+
+
+
+
+                                          4
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+          character
+               A 7-bit number the significance of which is given by the
+               ASCII standard.  When contained in a larger field, the
+               higher order bits are zero.  See:  "6. REFERENCES"
+
+          compilation
+               The action of converting text words from the input stream
+               into an internal form suitable for later execution.  When in
+               the compile state, the compilation addresses of FORTH words
+               are compiled into the dictionary for later execution by the
+               address interpreter.  Numbers are compiled to be placed on
+               the data stack when later executed.  Numbers are accepted
+               from the input stream unsigned or negatively signed and
+               converted using the value of BASE .  See:  "number"  "number
+               conversion"  "interpreter, text"
+
+          defining word
+               A word that, when executed, creates a new dictionary entry
+               in the compilation vocabulary.  The new word name is taken
+               from the input stream.  If the input stream is exhausted
+               before the new name is available, an error condition exists.
+               Example of defining words are:  :  CONSTANT  CREATE
+
+          definition
+               See:  "word definition"
+
+          dictionary
+               A structure of word definitions in computer memory which is
+               extensible and grows toward higher memory addresses.
+               Entries are organized in vocabularies to aid location by
+               name.  See:  "search order"
+
+          display
+               The process of sending one or more characters to the current
+               output device.  These characters are typically displayed or
+               printed on a terminal.  The selection of the current output
+               device is system dependent.
+
+          division, floored
+               Integer division in which the remainder carries the sign of
+               the divisor or is zero, and the quotient is rounded to its
+               arithmetic floor.  Note that, except for error conditions,
+               n1 n2 SWAP OVER /MOD ROT * + is identical to n1.  See:
+               "floor, arithmetic" 
+               Examples:
+                    dividend  divisor  remainder  quotient
+                      10        7        3          1
+                     -10        7        4         -2
+                      10       -7       -4         -2
+                     -10       -7       -3          1
+
+          equivalent execution
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          5
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               A standard program will produce the same results, exclusive
+               of timing dependencies, when given the same inputs on any
+               Standard System which has sufficient resources to execute
+               the program.  Only standard source programs are
+               transportable.
+
+          error condition
+               An exceptional condition which requires action by the system
+               which may be other than the expected function.  Refer to the
+               section "10. Error Conditions".
+
+          false
+               A zero number represents the false state of a flag.
+
+          flag
+               A number that may have one of two logical states, false or
+               true.  See:  "false"  "true"
+
+          floor, arithmetic
+               If z is any real number, then the floor of z is the greatest
+               integer less than or equal to z.
+                    The floor of +.6 is 0
+                    The floor of -.4 is -1
+
+          free field format
+               Numbers are converted using the value of BASE and then
+               displayed with no leading zeros.  A trailing space is
+               displayed.  The number of characters displayed is the
+               minimum number of characters, at least one, to uniquely
+               represent the number.  See:  "number conversion"
+
+          glossary
+               A set of explanations in natural language to describe the
+               corresponding computer execution of word definitions.
+
+          immediate word
+               A word which executes when encountered during compilation or
+               interpretation.  Immediate words handle special cases during
+               compilation.  See, for example, IF LITERAL ." etc.
+
+          input stream
+               A sequence of characters available to the system, for
+               processing by the text interpreter.  The input stream
+               conventionally may be taken from the current input device
+               (via the text input buffer) and mass storage (via a block
+               buffer).  BLK , >IN , TIB and #TIB specify the input stream.
+               Words using or altering BLK , >IN , TIB and #TIB are
+               responsible for maintaining and restoring control of the
+               input stream.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          6
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               The input stream extends from the offset value of >IN to the
+               size of the input stream.  If BLK is zero the input stream
+               is contained within the area addressed by TIB and is #TIB
+               bytes long.  If BLK is non-zero the input stream is
+               contained within the block buffer specified by BLK and is
+               1024 bytes long.   See:  "11.8 Input Text"
+
+          interpreter, address
+               The machine code instructions, routine or other facilities
+               that execute compiled word definitions containing
+               compilation addresses.
+
+          interpreter, text
+               The word definitions(s) that repeatedly accepts a word name
+               from the input stream, locates the corresponding compilation
+               address and starts the address interpreter to execute it.
+               Text from the input stream interpreted as a number leaves
+               the corresponding value on the data stack.  Numbers are
+               accepted from the input stream unsigned or negatively signed
+               and converted using the value of BASE .  See:  "number"
+               "number conversion"
+
+          layers
+               The grouping of word names of each Standard word set to show
+               like characteristics.  No implementation requirements are
+               implied by this grouping.
+
+          layer, compiler
+               Word definitions which add new procedures to the dictionary
+               or which aid compilation by adding compilation addresses or
+               data structures to the dictionary.
+
+          layer, devices
+               Word definitions which allow access to mass storage and
+               computer peripheral devices.
+
+          layer, interpreter
+               Word definitions which support vocabularies, terminal
+               output, and the interpretation of text from the text input
+               buffer or a mass storage device by executing the
+               corresponding word definitions.
+
+          layer, nucleus
+               Word definitions generally defined in machine code that
+               control the execution of the fundamental operations of a
+               virtual FORTH machine.  This includes the address
+               interpreter.
+
+          load
+               Redirection of the text interpreter's input stream to be
+               from mass storage.  This is the general method for
+               compilation of new definitions into the dictionary.
+
+          mass storage
+
+
+
+                                          7
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               Storage which might reside outside FORTH's address space.
+               Mass storage data is made available in the form of 1024-byte
+               blocks.  A block is accessible within the FORTH address
+               space in a block buffer.  When a block has been indicated as
+               UPDATEed (modified) the block will ultimately be transferred
+               to mass storage.
+
+          number
+               When values exist within a larger field, the most-
+               significant bits are zero.  16-bit numbers are represented
+               in memory by addressing the first of two bytes at
+               consecutive addresses.  The byte order is unspecified by
+               this Standard.  Double numbers are represented on the stack
+               with the most-significant 16 bits (with sign) most
+               accessible.  Double numbers are represented in memory by two
+               consecutive 16-bit numbers.  The address of the least
+               significant 16 bits is two greater than the address of the
+               most significant 16 bits.  The byte order within each 16-bit
+               field is unspecified.  See:  "arithmetic, two's complement"
+               "number types" "9.8 Numbers"  "11.7 Stack Parameters"
+
+          number conversion
+               Numbers are maintained internally in binary and represented
+               externally by using graphic characters within the ASCII
+               character set.  Conversion between the internal and external
+               forms is performed using the current value of BASE to
+               determine the digits of a number.  A digit has a value
+               ranging from zero to the value of BASE-1.  The digit with
+               the value zero is represented by the ASCII character "0"
+               (position 3/0 with the decimal equivalent of 48).  This
+               representation of digits proceeds through the ASCII
+               character set to the character "(" corresponding to the
+               decimal value 9.  For digits with a value exceeding 9, the
+               ASCII graphic characters beginning with the character "A"
+               (position 4/1 with the decimal equivalent 65) corresponding
+               to the decimal value 10 are used.  This sequence then
+               continues up to and including the digit with the decimal
+               value 71 which is represented by the ASCII character "~"
+               (position 7/14 with a decimal equivalent 126).  A negative
+               number may be represented by preceding the digits with a
+               single leading minus sign, the character "-".
+
+          number types
+               All number types consist of some number of bits.  These bits
+               are either arbitrary or are weighted.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          8
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               Signed and unsigned numbers use weighted bits.  Weighted
+               bits within a number have a value of a power of two
+               beginning with the rightmost (least-significant) bit having
+               the value of two to the zero power.  This weighting
+               continues to the leftmost bit increasing the power by one
+               for each bit.  For an unsigned number this weighting pattern
+               includes the leftmost bit; thus, for an unsigned 16-bit
+               number the weight of the leftmost bit is 32,768.  For a
+               signed number this weighting pattern includes the leftmost
+               bit but the weight of the leftmost bit is negated; thus, for
+               a signed 16-bit number the weight of the leftmost bit is
+               -32,768.  This weighting pattern for signed numbers is
+               called two's complement notation.
+
+               Unspecified weighted numbers are either unsigned numbers or
+               signed numbers; program context determines whether the
+               number is signed or unsigned.  See:  "11.7 Stack Parameters"
+
+          pictured numeric output
+               The use of numeric output definitions which convert
+               numerical values into text strings.  These definitions are
+               used in a sequence which resembles a symbolic 'picture' of
+               the desired text format.  Conversion proceeds from least-
+               significant digit to most-significant digit, and converted
+               characters are stored from higher memory addresses to lower.
+
+          program
+               A complete specification of execution to achieve a specific
+               function (application task) expressed in FORTH source code
+               form.
+
+          receive
+               The process of obtaining one character from the current
+               input device.  The selection of the current input device is
+               system dependent.
+
+          recursion
+               The process of self-reference, either directly or
+               indirectly.
+
+          return
+               The means of indicating the end of text by striking a key on
+               an input device.  The key used is system dependent.  This
+               key is typically called "RETURN", "CARRIAGE RETURN", or
+               "ENTER".
+
+          screen
+               Textual data arranged for editing.  By convention, a screen
+               consists of 16 lines (numbered 0 through 15) of 64
+               characters each.  Screens usually contain program source
+               text, but may be used to view mass storage data.  The first
+               byte of a screen occupies the first byte of a mass storage
+               block, which is the beginning point for text interpretation
+               during a load.
+
+
+
+                                          9
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+          search order
+               A specification of the order in which selected vocabularies
+               in the dictionary are searched.  Execution of a vocabulary
+               makes it the first vocabulary in the search order.  The
+               dictionary is searched whenever a word is to be located by
+               its name.  This order applies to all dictionary searches
+               unless otherwise noted.  The search order begins with the
+               last vocabulary executed and ends with FORTH , unless
+               altered in a system dependent manner.
+
+          source definition
+               Text consisting of word names suitable for compilation or
+               execution by the text interpreter.  Such text is usually
+               arranged in screens and maintained on a mass storage device.
+
+          stack, data
+               A last in, first out list consisting of 16-bit binary
+               values.  This stack is primarily used to hold intermediate
+               values during execution of word definitions.  Stack values
+               may represent numbers, characters, addresses, boolean
+               values, etc.
+
+               When the name 'stack' is used alone, it implies the data
+               stack.
+
+          stack, return
+               A last in, first out list which contains the addresses of
+               word definitions whose execution has not been completed by
+               the address interpreter.  As a word definition passes
+               control to another definition, the return point is placed on
+               the return stack.
+
+               The return stack may cautiously be used for other values.
+
+          string, counted
+               A sequence of consecutive 8-bit bytes located in memory by
+               their low memory address.  The byte at this address contains
+               a count {0..255} of the number of bytes following which are
+               part of the string.  The count does not include the count
+               byte itself.  Counted strings usually contain ASCII
+               characters.
+
+          string, text
+               A sequence of consecutive 8-bit bytes located in memory by
+               their low memory address and length in bytes.  Strings
+               usually, but not exclusively, contain ASCII characters.
+               When the term 'string' is used alone or in conjunction with
+               other words it refers to text strings.
+
+          structure, control
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         10
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               A group of FORTH words which when executed alter the
+               execution sequence.  The group starts and terminates with
+               compiler words.  Examples of control structures:  DO ...
+               LOOP  DO ... +LOOP  BEGIN ... WHILE ... REPEAT  BEGIN ...
+               UNTIL  IF ... THEN  IF ... ELSE ... THEN  See:  "9.9 Control
+               Structures"
+
+          transportability
+               This term indicates that equivalent execution results when a
+               program is executed on other than the system on which it was
+               created.  See:  "equivalent execution"
+
+          true
+               A non-zero value represents the true state of a flag.  Any
+               non-zero value will be accepted by a standard word as
+               'true'; all standard words return a 16-bit value with all
+               bits set to one when returning a 'true' flag.
+
+          user area
+               An area in memory which contains the storage for user
+               variable.
+
+          variable, user
+               A variable whose data storage area is usually located in the
+               user area.  Some system variables are maintained in the user
+               area so that the words may be re-entrant to different users.
+
+          vocabulary
+               An ordered list of word definitions.  Vocabularies are an
+               advantage in separating different word definitions that may
+               have the same name.  More than one definition with the same
+               name can exist in one vocabulary.  The latter is called a
+               redefinition.  The most recently created redefinition will
+               be found when the vocabulary is searched.
+
+          vocabulary, compilation
+               The vocabulary into which new word definitions are appended.
+
+          word
+               A sequence of characters terminated by one blank or the end
+               of the input stream.  Leading blanks are ignored.  Words are
+               usually obtained via the input stream.
+
+          word definition
+               A named FORTH execution procedure compiled into the
+               dictionary.  Its execution may be defined in terms of
+               machine code, as a sequence of compilation address, or other
+               compiled words.
+
+          word name
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         11
+
+
+
+
+
+          5.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
+
+
+               The name of a word definition.  Word names are limited to 31
+               characters and may not contain an ASCII space.  If two
+               definitions have different word names in the same vocabulary
+               they must be uniquely findable when this vocabulary is
+               searched.  See:  "vocabulary"  "9.5.3 EXPECT"
+
+          word set
+               A named group of FORTH word definitions in the Standard.
+
+          word set, assembler extension
+               Additional words which facilitate programming in the native
+               machine language of the computer which are by nature system
+               dependent.
+
+          word set, double number extension
+               Additional words which facilitate manipulation of 32-bit
+               numbers.
+
+          word set, required
+               The minimum words needed to compile and execute Standard
+               Programs.
+
+          word set, system extension
+               Additional words which facilitate the access to internal
+               system characteristics.
+
+          word, standard
+               A named FORTH procedure definition, in the Required word set
+               or any extension word sets, formally reviewed and accepted
+               by the Standards Team.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         12
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-6.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-6.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8762cb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-6.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+
+
+
+
+          6.   REFERENCES
+
+
+
+
+                                   6.   REFERENCES
+
+
+          The following document is considered to be a portion of this
+          Standard:
+
+               `American National Standard Code for Information Interchange`,
+               X3.4-1977 (ASCII), American National Standards Institute,
+               1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018, USA.
+
+          The following documents are noted as pertinent to the FORTH-83
+          Standard, but are not part of this Standard.
+
+               FORTH-77, FORTH Users Group, FST-780314
+
+               FORTH-78, FORTH International Standards Team
+
+               FORTH-79, FORTH Standards Team
+
+               FORTH-83 STANDARD, Appendices, FORTH Standards Team
+
+          `Webster's Collegiate Dictionary` shall be used to resolve                       
+          conflicts in spelling and English word usage.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         13
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-7.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-7.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a0290c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-7.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+
+
+
+
+          7.   REQUIREMENTS
+
+
+          3.   Return stack of 48 bytes;
+
+          4.   Mass storage capacity of 32 blocks, numbered 0 through 31;
+
+          5.   One ASCII input/output device acting as an operator's
+               terminal.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         15
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-8.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eac761c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+
+
+
+
+          8.   COMPLIANCE AND LABELING
+
+
+
+
+                            8.   COMPLIANCE AND LABELING
+
+
+          The FORTH Standards Team hereby specifies the requirements for
+          labeling of systems and applications so that the conditions for
+          program portability may be established.
+
+          A Standard System may use the specified labeling if it complies
+          with the terms of this Standard and meets the particular Word Set
+          definitions.
+
+          A Standard Program (application) may use the specified labeling
+          if it utilizes the specified Standard System according to this
+          Standard and executes equivalently on any such system.
+
+          In a system or application, a standard word may not be redefined
+          to perform a different function within the vocabulary FORTH.
+
+
+          FORTH Standard
+
+          A system may be labeled:
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard
+
+          if it includes all of the Required Word Set in either source or
+          object form and complies with the text of this Standard.  After
+          executing "FORTH-83" the dictionary must contain all of the
+          Required Word Set in the vocabulary FORTH, as specified in this
+          Standard.
+
+
+          Standard Sub-set
+
+          A system may be labeled:
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard Sub-set
+
+          if it includes a portion of the Required Word Set and complies
+          with the remaining text of this Standard.  However, no Required
+          Word may be present with a non-standard definition.
+
+
+          Standard with Extensions
+
+          A system may be labeled:
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard with <name> Standard Extension(s)
+
+          if it comprises a FORTH-83 Standard System and one or more
+          Standard Extension Word Set(s).  For example, a designation would
+          be in the form:
+
+
+
+                                         16
+
+
+
+
+
+          8.   COMPLIANCE AND LABELING
+
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard with Double-Number Standard Extension
+
+
+          Standard Program
+
+          A FORTH source program which executes equivalently on any
+          Standard System may be labeled:
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard Program
+
+          See:  "equivalent execution"  "7. REQUIREMENTS"
+
+
+          Standard Program with Environmental Dependencies
+
+          A program which is standard in all ways except for specific
+          environmentally dependent words may be labeled:
+
+               FORTH-83 Standard Program with Environmental Dependencies
+
+          if the following additional requirements are met:
+
+               1) Environmental dependencies (including hardware
+               dependencies) shall be factored into an isolated set of
+               application word definitions.
+
+               2) Each environmentally dependent word definition must be
+               fully documented, including all dependencies in a manner at
+               least as detailed as the standard words.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         17
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-9.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-9.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15f8c6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-9.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,199 @@
+
+
+
+
+          9.   USAGE
+
+
+
+
+                                     9.   USAGE
+
+
+
+          9.1  Words Names and Word Definitions
+
+          A Standard Program may reference only the definitions of the
+          Required Word Set and Standard Extensions and definitions which
+          are subsequently defined in terms of these words.  Furthermore, A
+          Standard Program must use the standard words as required by any
+          conventions of this Standard.  Equivalent execution must result
+          from Standard Programs.
+
+          The implementation of a Standard System may use words and
+          techniques outside the scope of the Standard, provided that no
+          program running on that system is required to use words outside
+          the Standard for normal operation.
+
+          If a Standard System or Standard Program redefines Standard
+          definitions within the FORTH vocabulary, these definitions must
+          comply with the Standard.
+
+
+          9.2  Addressable Memory
+
+          The FORTH system may share the dictionary space with the user's
+          application.  The native addressing protocol of the host computer
+          is beyond the scope of this Standard.
+
+          Therefore, in a Standard Program, the user may only operate on
+          data which was stored by the application.  No exceptions!
+
+          A Standard Program may address:
+
+          1.   parameter fields of words created with CREATE , VARIABLE ,
+               and user defined words which execute CREATE ;
+
+          2.   dictionary space ALLOTted;
+
+          3.   data in a valid mass storage block buffer.   
+               See:  "9.7 Multiprogramming Impact";
+
+          4.   data area of user variables;
+
+          5.   text input buffer and PAD up to the amount specified as the
+               minimum for each area.
+
+          A Standard Program may NOT address:
+
+          1.   directly into the data or return stacks;
+
+          2.   into a definition's name field, link field, or code field;
+
+
+
+                                         18
+
+
+
+
+
+          9.   USAGE
+
+
+          3.   into a definition's parameter field if not stored by the
+               application.
+
+
+          9.3  Return Stack
+
+          A Standard Program may cautiously use the return stack with the
+          following restrictions:
+
+          The return stack may not be accessed inside a do-loop for values
+          placed on the return stack before the loop was entered.  Further,
+          neither I nor J may be used to obtain the index of a loop if
+          values are placed and remain on the return stack within the loop.
+          When the do-loop is executed all values placed on the return
+          stack within that loop must be removed before LOOP , +LOOP , or
+          LEAVE is executed.  Similarly, all values placed on the return
+          stack within a colon definition must be removed before the colon
+          definition is terminated at ; or before EXIT is executed.
+
+
+          9.4  Compilation
+
+          The system uses the return stack and the dictionary in a system
+          dependent manner during the compilation of colon definitions.
+          Some words use the data stack in a system dependent manner during
+          compilation.  See:  "sys (11.7)"
+
+
+          9.5  Terminal Input and Output
+
+
+          9.5.1     KEY
+
+          A Standard System must receive all valid ASCII characters.  Each
+          KEY receives one ASCII character, with more-significant bits
+          environmentally dependent and might be zero.  KEY must receive as
+          many bits as are obtainable.  A Standard Program without
+          environmental dependencies may only use the least significant 7-
+          bit ASCII character received by KEY .  For example:  KEY 127 AND
+
+
+          9.5.2     EXPECT
+
+          Control characters may be processed to allow system dependent
+          editing of the characters prior to receipt.  Therefore, a
+          Standard Program may not anticipated that control characters can
+          be received.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         19
+
+
+
+
+
+          9.   USAGE
+
+
+          9.5.3     EMIT
+
+          Because of the potential non-transportable action by terminal
+          devices of control characters, the use of ASCII control
+          characters is an environmental dependency.  Each EMIT deals with
+          only one ASCII character.  The ASCII character occupies the
+          least-significant 7 bits; the more-significant bits may be
+          environmentally dependent.  Using the more-significant bits when
+          other than zero is an environmentally dependent usage.  EMIT must
+          display as many bits as can be sent.
+
+
+          9.5.4     TYPE
+
+          Because of the potential non-transportable action by terminal
+          devices of control characters, the use of ASCII control
+          characters is an environmental dependency.
+
+
+          9.6  Transporting Programs Between Standard Systems
+
+          Further usage requirements are expected to be added for
+          transporting programs between Standard Systems.
+
+
+          9.7  Multiprogramming Impact
+
+          In a multiprogrammed system, Device Layer words and those words
+          which implicitly reference the Device Layer words may relinquish
+          control of the processor to other tasks.  Although there is
+          insufficient experience to specify a standard for
+          multiprogramming, historical usage dictates that a programmer be
+          aware of the potential impact with regard to resources shared
+          between tasks.  The only shared resources specified within the
+          Standard are block buffers.  Therefore the address of a block
+          buffer returned by BLOCK or BUFFER becomes invalid during and
+          after the execution of any word marked by the attribute M in the
+          glossary or any words executing them.  A block buffer is valid
+          only if its address is valid.  See:  "11.4 Attributes"
+
+
+          9.8  Numbers
+
+          Interpreted or compiled numbers are in the range
+          {-32,768..65,535}.  See:  "number conversion"
+
+
+          9.9  Control Structures
+
+          Control structures are compiled inside colon definitions.
+          Control structures can be nested but cannot overlap.  For
+          additional limitations see DO .
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         20
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-a.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-a.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd04375
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-a.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+
+
+
+
+          A.  STANDARDS TEAM MEMBERSHIP
+
+
+
+
+                       APPENDIX A.  STANDARDS TEAM MEMBERSHIP
+
+
+
+          A.1  Standard Team Membership:  Members
+
+          The following is a list in alphabetical order of the people who
+          are FORTH Standards Team Members.  These names are provided to
+          indicate the texture and make-up of the team itself.  Where
+          appropriate, the official capacity of individuals is also
+          indicated.
+
+               Paul Bartholdi, Sauverny, Switzerland
+               Robert Berkey, Palo Alto, California USA          Treasurer
+               David Boulton, Redwood City, California USA
+               John Bumgarner, Morgan Hill, California USA
+               Don Colburn, Rockville, Maryland USA
+               James T. Currie, Jr., Blacksburg, Virginia USA
+               Thomas B. Dowling, Lowell, Massachusetts USA
+               William S. Emery, Malibu, California USA
+               Lawrence P. Forsley, Rochester, New York USA
+               Kim R. Harris, Palo Alto, California USA          Referee
+               John S. James, Los Gatos, California USA
+               Guy M. Kelly, La Jolla, California USA            Chair
+               Thea Martin, Rochester, New York USA
+               Michael McNeil, Scotts Valley, California USA
+               Robert E. Patten, Modesto, California USA
+               Michael Perry, Berkeley, California USA
+               David C. Petty, Cambridge, Massachusetts USA
+               William F. Ragsdale, Hayward, California USA
+               Elizabeth D. Rather, Hermosa Beach, California USA
+               Dean Sanderson, Hermosa Beach, California USA     Referee
+               Klaus Schleisiek, Hamburg, W-Germany
+               George W. Shaw II, Hayward, California USA        Referee
+               Robert L. Smith, Palo Alto, California USA        Secretary
+               Michael K. Starling, Elkview, West Virginia USA
+               John K. Stevenson, Portland, Oregon USA
+               Glenn S. Tenney, San Mateo, California USA        Referee
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         55
+
+
+
+
+
+          A.  STANDARDS TEAM MEMBERSHIP
+
+
+          
+
+
+          A.2  FORTH Standards Team Sponsors
+
+          The following is a list in alphabetical order of individuals and
+          organizations who have contributed funds and other assistance to
+          aid the word of the FST and deserve recognition for their
+          involvement.  FST sponsors have no duties or responsibilities in
+          the FST, but they receive copies of proposals and comments
+          considered at a formal meeting, and drafts and adopted standards
+          prepared as a result of that meeting.
+
+          Creative Solutions Inc., 4801 Randolph Rd., Rockville, MD 20852
+          USA
+
+          Fantasia Systems Inc., 1059 Alameda de las Pulgas, Belmont, CA
+          94002  USA
+
+          FORTH, Inc., 2309 Pacific Coast Highway, Hermosa Beach, CA 90254
+          USA
+
+          FORTH Interest Group Inc., P.O. Box 1105, San Carlos, CA 94070
+          USA
+
+          Forthright Enterprises, P.O. Box 50911, Palo Alto, CA 94020  USA
+
+          Glen Haydon Enterprises, Box 439 Rt. 2, La Honda, CA 94020  USA
+
+          John K. Gotwals, W. Lafayette, IN  USA
+
+          John D. Hall, Oakland, CA  USA
+
+          Hartronix, Inc., 1201 N. Stadem, Tempe, AZ  85281  USA
+
+          Hewlett-Packard Corvallis Div., 1000 NE Circle Blvd., Corvallis,
+          OR  97330  USA
+
+          Information Unlimited Software, Inc., 2401 Marinship, Sausalito,
+          CA 94965  USA
+
+          Henry H. Laxen, 1259 Cornell Avenue, Berkeley, CA 94705  USA
+
+          Laxen & Harris, Inc.
+
+          George B. Lyons, 280 Henderson Street, Jersey Cit, NJ 07302  USA
+
+          C. Kevin McCabe, Chicago, IL  USA
+
+          MicroMotion, 12077 Wilshire Blvd #506, Los Angeles, CA 90025  USA
+
+          Bruce R. Montague, Monterey, CA  USA
+
+          Mountain View Press, P.O. Box 4659, Mountain View, CA 94040  USA
+
+
+
+                                         56
+
+
+
+
+
+          A.  STANDARDS TEAM MEMBERSHIP
+
+
+          Michael A. Perry, Berkeley, CA  USA
+
+          Robert Berkey Services, 2334 Dumbarton Ave., Palo Alto, CA 94303
+          USA
+
+          Royal Greenwich Observatory, Herstmonsioux Castle, Eastbourne,
+          England
+
+          Shaw Laboratories, Ltd., 24301 Southland Drive #216, Hayward, CA
+          94545  USA
+
+          Sygnetron Protection Systems, Inc., 2103 Greenspring, Timonium,
+          MD 21093  USA
+
+          Telelogic Inc., 196 Broadway, Cambridge, MA 02139  USA
+
+          UNISOFT, P.O. Box 2644, New Carrollton, MD 20784  USA
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         57
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-c.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-c.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aff3b08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-c.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,594 @@
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+
+
+                         APPENDIX C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          Since FORTH is an extensible language and subject to evolution,
+          the Standard contains a section describing experimental
+          proposals.  FORTH users are encouraged to study, implement, and
+          try these proposals to aid in the analysis of and the decision
+          for or against future adoption into the Standard.  Readers are
+          cautioned that these proposals contain opinions and conclusions
+          of the authors of the proposals and that these proposals may
+          contain non-standard source code.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         65
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          
+
+
+
+                       SEARCH ORDER SPECIFICATION AND CONTROL
+
+
+                                 WILLIAM F. RAGSDALE
+
+
+          1  INTRODUCTION
+
+               The method of selecting the order in which the dictionary is
+          searched has grown from unchained vocabularies to the present use
+          of chained vocabularies.  Many techniques are in use for
+          specification of the sequence in which multiple vocabularies may
+          be searched.  In order to offer generality and yet get precision
+          in specification, this proposal is offered.
+
+
+          2  DESCRIPTION
+
+          The following functions are required:
+
+          1.   Two search orders exist.  CONTEXT is the group of
+               vocabularies searched during interpretation of text from the
+               input stream.  CURRENT is the single vocabulary into which
+               new definitions are compiled, and from which FORGET
+               operates.
+
+          2.   Empty CONTEXT to a minimum number of system words.  These
+               are just the words to further specify the search order.
+
+          3.   Add individual vocabularies into CONTEXT.  The most recently
+               added is searched first.
+
+          4.   Specify which single vocabulary will become CURRENT.
+
+               The following optional functions aid the user:
+
+          1.   Display the word names of the first vocabulary in the
+               CONTEXT search order.
+
+          2.   Display the vocabulary names comprising CURRENT and CONTEXT
+               search orders.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         66
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          3  ADVANTAGES
+
+               Use over the past year has demonstrated that the proposed
+          methods may emulate the vocabulary selection of all other
+          systems.  The order is explicit by execution, may be interpreted
+          and compiled, and is obvious from the declaration.  The search
+          order is specified at run-time rather than the time a new
+          vocabulary is created.
+
+
+          4  DISADVANTAGES
+
+               By migrating to a common structure, vendors give up one
+          point at which they may claim their product is better than
+          others.  Another drawback is that the number of CONTEXT
+          vocabularies is fixed; older methods had an indefinite 'tree'
+          structure.  In practice, the branching of such a structure was
+          very rarely greater than four.
+
+               Forth words operate in a context sensitive environment, as
+          word names may be redefined and have different definitions in
+          different vocabularies.  This proposal compounds the problem.  By
+          displaying the search order names, the user at least can readily
+          verify the search order.
+
+
+          5  IMPACT
+
+               The text of the Forth 83 Standard has been carefully chosen
+          for consistency and generality.  However, no specification on how
+          the search order is developed by the user is given.  This
+          omission is unavoidable, due to the diversity of contemporary
+          practice.  This proposal is intended to complete the Forth 83
+          requirements in a fashion that exceeds all other methods.
+
+               Previously standardized words continue in their use:
+          VOCABULARY, FORTH, DEFINITIONS, and FORGET.  However, this
+          proposal assumes that vocabulary names are not IMMEDIATE .
+
+
+          6  DEFINITIONS
+
+          Search order:  
+               The sequence in which vocabularies are selected when
+               locating a word by name in the dictionary.  Consists of one
+               transient and up to three resident vocabularies.
+
+          Transient order:    
+               Execution of any vocabulary makes it the first vocabulary
+               searched, replacing the previously selected transient
+               vocabulary.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         67
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          Resident order:     
+               After searching the transient order, up to three additional
+               vocabularies may be searched.  The application program
+               controls this selection.
+
+
+          7  GLOSSARY
+
+          ONLY         --                            ONLY
+               Select just the ONLY vocabulary as both the transient
+               vocabulary and resident vocabulary in the search order.
+
+          FORTH        --                            ONLY                 
+               The name of the primary vocabulary.  Execution makes FORTH
+               the transient vocabulary, the first in the search order, and
+               thus replaces the previous transient vocabulary.
+
+          ALSO         --                            ONLY                 
+               The transient vocabulary becomes the first vocabulary in the
+               resident portion of the search order.  Up to the last two
+               resident vocabularies will also be reserved, in order,
+               forming the resident search order.
+
+          ORDER        --                            ONLY                 
+               Display the vocabulary names forming the search order in
+               their present search order sequence.  Then show the
+               vocabulary into which new definitions will be placed.
+
+          WORDS        --                            ONLY                 
+               Display the word names in the transient vocabulary, starting
+               with the most recent definition.
+
+          FORGET       --                            ONLY                 
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       FORGET <name>                 
+               Delete from the dictionary <name> and all words added to the
+               dictionary after <name> regardless of the vocabulary.
+               Failure to find <name> is an error condition.  An error
+               condition also exists upon implicitly forgetting a
+               vocabulary (due to its definition after <name>).
+
+          DEFINITIONS  --                            ONLY                 
+               Select the transient vocabulary as the current vocabulary
+               into which subsequent definitions will be added.
+
+          SEAL         --                            ONLY                 
+               Delete all occurances of ONLY from the search order.  The
+               effect is that only specified application vocabularies will
+               be searched.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         68
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          8  TYPICAL SOURCE CODE
+
+           0 ( ALSO  ONLY                                     82jun12 WFR )
+           1 ( note the systems -FIND searches 1 to 5 vocabs in CONTEXT   )
+           2 VOCABULARY ONLY    ONLY DEFINITIONS
+           3 : ALSO                       ( slide transient into resident )
+           4       CONTEXT DUP 2+ 6 CMOVE>  ;
+           5
+           6    HERE 2+ ]          ( alter run time from usual vocabulary )
+           7        DOES>  CONTEXT 8 ERASE DUP CONTEXT !    CONTEXT 8 + !
+           8               ALSO  EXIT [
+           9        ' ONLY CFA !        ( Patch into ONLY; make NULL word )
+          10 CREATE X  ' EXIT >BODY X !     41088 ' X NFA ! IMMEDIATE
+          11 : FORTH      FORTH ;
+          12 : DEFINITIONS DEFINITIONS ;         : FORGET  FORGET ;
+          13 : VOCABULARY  VOCABULARY  ;         : ONLY      ONLY ;
+          14 : WORDS       WORDS  ;
+          15
+
+           0 ( ORDER                                         82jun12 WFR )
+           1 : ORDER     ( show the search order )
+           2    10 SPACES  CONTEXT 10 OVER + SWAP
+           3       DO I @ ?DUP 0= ?LEAVE  ID. 2 +LOOP
+           4  10 SPACES  CURRENT @ ID.  ;
+           5
+           6 ONLY FORTH ALSO   DEFINITIONS
+           7
+           8
+           9
+          10
+          11
+          12
+          13
+          14
+          15
+
+
+          9  EXAMPLES OF USE
+
+               ONLY           reduce search order to minimum
+               FORTH          search FORTH then ONLY
+               ALSO EDITOR    search EDITOR, FORTH then ONLY
+               DEFINITIONS    new definitions will be added into the EDITOR
+
+               The same sequence would be compiled:
+
+               : SETUP  ONLY FORTH  ALSO EDITOR DEFINITIONS ;
+
+
+          10  REFERENCES
+
+          W. F. Ragsdale, The 'ONLY' Concept for Vocabularies, Proceedings
+          of the 1982 FORML Conference, pub. Forth Interest Group.
+
+
+
+
+                                         69
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          W. F. Ragsdale, fig-FORTH Installation Manual, Forth Interest
+          Group.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         70
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          
+
+
+
+                    DEFINITION FIELD ADDRESS CONVERSION OPERATORS
+
+
+                                         by
+
+                                    Kim R. Harris
+
+
+          A.  INTRODUCTION
+
+          The standard provides a transportable way to obtain the
+          compilation address of a definition in the dictionary of a FORTH
+          system (cf., FIND and ' ).  It also provides an operator to
+          convert a compilation address to its corresponding parameter
+          field address.  However, the standard does not provide a
+          transportable way to convert either of these addresses to the
+          other fields of a definition.  Since various FORTH
+          implementations have different dictionary structures, a standard
+          set of conversion operators would increase transportability and
+          readability.
+
+          A set of words is proposed which allows the conversion of any
+          definitions field address to any other.
+
+
+          B.  GLOSSARY
+
+          In the following words, the compilation address is either the
+          source or the destination, so it is not indicated in the names.
+
+          >BODY        addr1 -- addr2                            "to-body"
+               addr2 is the parameter field address corresponding to the
+               compilation address addr1.
+
+          >NAME        addr1 -- addr2                            "to-name"
+               addr2 is the name field address corresponding to the
+               compilation address addr1.
+
+          >LINK        addr1 -- addr2                            "to-link"
+               addr2 is the link field address corresponding to the
+               compilation address addr1.
+
+          BODY>        addr1 -- addr2                          "from-body"
+               addr2 is the compilation address corresponding to the
+               parameter field address addr1.
+
+          NAME>        addr1 -- addr2                          "from-name"
+               addr2 is the compilation address corresponding to the name
+               field address addr1.
+
+
+
+
+                                         71
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          LINK>        addr1 -- addr2                          "from-link"
+               addr2 is the compilation address corresponding to the link
+               field address addr1.
+
+          The previous set of words is complete, but may be inefficient for
+          going between two fields when one is not the compilation address.
+          For greater efficiency, additional operators may be defined which
+          name both the source and destination fields.
+
+          N>LINK       addr1 -- addr2                       "name-to-link"
+               addr2 is the link field address corresponding to the name
+               field address addr1.
+
+          L>NAME       addr1 -- addr2                       "link-to-name"
+               addr2 is the name field address corresponding to the link
+               field address addr1.
+
+
+          C.  DISCUSSION
+
+          The previous words provide a complete, consistent, and efficient
+          set of definition field address conversion operations.  They can
+          be implemented in a FORTH system which uses any combination of
+          the following options for its dictionary structure:
+
+               Link fields first or second.
+               Fixed or variable length name fields.
+               Additional fields in the definitions structure.
+
+               Heads contiguous or separated from bodies.
+
+               Indirect, direct, subroutine, or token threaded code.
+
+          The words are compatible with this standard; their inclusion
+          would not require other changes to be made to the standard.
+
+          Disadvantages to including them in the standard include:
+
+               They add 6 to 8 more words to the standard.
+
+               A standard program may not use all of them since it is not
+               allowed to access the name or link fields.  However, this
+               does not disqualify them from being in the standard.
+
+               If a definition's head is not in the dictionary, an error
+               condition would exist.  In this case, what action should the
+               words take in an implemented system?
+
+          The author of this experimental proposal recommends that FORTH
+          system implementors try them and that they be included in the
+          System Word Set of the next FORTH standard.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         72
+
+
+
+
+
+          C.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          D.  SOURCE CODE EXAMPLE
+
+          High level source code is shown below for a very simple
+          dictionary structure.  This code assumes a FORTH system which
+          uses indirect threaded code, heads contiguous to bodies, and a
+          definition structure of the following format:
+
+               Name field, 4 bytes long, fixed length.
+               Link field, 2 bytes long.
+               Code field, 2 bytes long.
+               Parameter field, variable length.
+
+          : >BODY   ( acf -- apf )  2+  ;
+          : BODY>   ( apf -- acf )  2-  ;
+          : >LINK   ( acf -- alf )  2-  ;
+          : LINK>   ( alf -- acf )  2-  ;
+          : >NAME   ( acf -- anf )  6 - ;
+          : NAME>   ( anf -- alf )  6 + ;
+          : N>LINK  ( anf -- alf )  4 + ;
+          : L>NAME  ( alf -- anf )  4 - ;
+
+
+          E.  EXAMPLES OF USE
+
+          No examples are given because their use should be obvious.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         73
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-d.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-d.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4889839
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-d.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,728 @@
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+
+
+                                     APPENDIX D.
+                                          
+                                          
+                                       CHARTER
+                                          
+                                       of the
+                                          
+                                FORTH STANDARDS TEAM
+
+
+
+          1.  Purpose and Goals
+
+
+          1.1  Purpose
+
+               1.1.1  This Charter establishes and guides a voluntary
+               membership professional organization, the FORTH Standards
+               Team (hereafter referred to as the "FST") and provides a
+               method for its operation.
+
+
+          1.2  Goals
+
+               1.2.1  The goal of the FST is the creation, maintenance, and
+               proliferation of a standard (hereafter referred to as the
+               "Standard") for the FORTH computer programming system and
+               for application programs executed by a Standard system.  The
+               Standard shall specify requirements and constraints which
+               such computer software must satisfy.
+
+               1.2.2  The team shall also develop a method of
+               identification and labeling of FORTH implementations and
+               programs which conform to the Standard.
+
+
+          1.3  Organization
+
+               1.3.1  The FST is a voluntary membership organization with
+               no formal status as a legal entity.  It operates by
+               consensus of the professional and commercial FORTH community
+               and conducts business by the professional discourse and
+               agreement of its members.  It is intended that this Charter
+               be a guide to the operation of the FST subject to reasonable
+               minor digression, rather than being a rigid document under
+               which vested rights are granted.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         74
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+          2.  METHODS
+
+
+          2.1  Formal Meetings
+
+               2.1.1  The FST shall hold periodic formal meetings for
+               discussion and decisions concerning a current or future
+               Standard.
+
+               2.1.2  There is not specified frequency for formal meetings.
+               Each meeting shall be at such time and place as was decided
+               at the prior meeting.  If a meeting cannot be held as
+               decided, the Chairperson may designate another time and
+               place.
+
+               2.1.3  The Chairperson shall send a written notice at least
+               sixty (60) days in advance of each formal meeting to each
+               voting member.  A longer notification period is recommended.
+               It is anticipated that the continuing close coordination of
+               the participants, the decision at the prior formal meeting,
+               and publication of a meeting notice in FORTH Dimensions and
+               other trade journals will provide sufficient notice to the
+               FORTH community.
+
+               2.1.4  At a formal FST meeting, there shall be general
+               sessions consisting of all attendees.  General sessions are
+               for matters that are ready for discussion and decision.  All
+               votes concerning the Standard, Charter, or FST procedures
+               must take place during a general session.
+
+               2.1.5  Also at formal meetings, subteams will be established
+               to examine groups of proposals and to prepare
+               recommendations for a general session.  All meeting
+               attendees may participate in the work and voting of a
+               subteam.  Each subteam should elect from its members a
+               coordinator to conduct its meetings and a reporter to record
+               and report its recommendations.
+
+               2.1.6  The Chairperson may publish and distribute an agenda
+               at or in advance of a formal meeting.  As a guideline, each
+               day of a formal meeting begins with a general session,
+               followed by concurrent subteam meetings followed by another
+               general session.
+
+               2.1.7  In view of the voluntary nature of the FST, at least
+               one third of the membership is required to hold a formal
+               meeting.  Two thirds of the number of voting members present
+               at the start of each day's first general session shall set
+               the quorum for the remainder of that day.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         75
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+               2.1.8  Between formal meetings, the Chairperson may appoint
+               such informal working groups as is appropriate.  Each group
+               may be given a goal and scope to direct its activities.  Its
+               conclusions or recommendations must be given to the
+               Chairperson in written form.
+
+
+          2.2  Proposals and Comments
+
+               2.2.1  Prior to each formal meeting, the Chairperson may
+               solicit submission of comments and proposals for changes,
+               additions, or deletions to the then-current Standard, the
+               draft Standard or this Charter.  A cutoff date may be
+               specified for the submission of such proposals.
+
+               2.2.2  A considerable amount of information must accompany
+               each proposal to help FST members analyze the proposal.
+               Therefore, submission of proposals and comments shall be
+               according to the format and instructions shown in the
+               "Proposal/Comment Form" included as an Appendix to this
+               Standard.  Any proposal not in the appropriate form or
+               received after the cutoff date may not be considered unless
+               the Chairperson deems it to be of sufficient significance.
+
+               2.2.3  Unsolicited proposals and comments by volunteers are
+               acknowledged as valuable.  Any individual or group may
+               submit proposals and/or comments concerning the Standard or
+               this Charter.  These should be sent to the official address
+               of the FST.  Properly formatted proposals and comments are
+               preferred.  The author or a representative should plan to
+               attend the next formal meeting to emphasize, support, and
+               possibly modify the proposals.
+
+               2.2.4  Since the quantity of proposals and comments may
+               exceed the number for which there is time to be voted upon,
+               submission of a proposal does not automatically mean that it
+               will be voted upon at the next formal FST meeting.  The
+               Chairperson or some members appointed by the Chairperson or
+               elected by the voting members may screen and organize the
+               received proposals and comments for voting upon at the next
+               formal meeting.
+
+               2.2.5  To allow reflection and examination, proposals and
+               comments shall be distributed to FST voting members and
+               sponsors in advance of a formal meeting.  Proposals and
+               comments not distributed in advance, including proposals
+               made during a formal meeting, may be considered at the
+               discretion of the Chairperson.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         76
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+          2.3  Draft Standard
+
+               After a formal meeting, the referees and officers of the FST
+               shall prepare a draft Standard for review by the then-
+               current FST voting members.  The referees and officers shall
+               consolidate proposals accepted by vote during the meeting,
+               resolve any ambiguities or problems, and incorporate these
+               changes with the text of the previous Standard or draft
+               Standard.
+
+
+          2.4  Standard
+
+               2.4.1  The referees and officers may, by near unanimous
+               decision (not more than one no vote), declare the draft
+               Standard, as mentioned in the previous paragraph, as being
+               the proposed Standard.
+
+               2.4.2  A proposed Standard shall be distributed to all FST
+               voting members for a mail ballot.  This ballot shall be
+               based solely on the text of the proposed Standard as
+               distributed.
+
+               2.4.3  Each ballot returned shall be signed by the voting
+               member submitting it.  An affirmative vote of at least two
+               thirds of the voting members shall adopt the document.  Such
+               adoption makes the draft Standard the current, official FST
+               Standard which supersedes all prior Standards.
+
+
+          2.5  Charter
+
+               2.5.1  At a formal FST meeting, the charter may be amended
+               by a simple majority of voting members present provided that
+               at least one third of all voting members are present; such
+               amendments become effective at the end of the current formal
+               meeting.
+
+               2.5.2  At other than a formal FST meeting, the charter may
+               be amended by a simple majority of all voting members, such
+               vote to be taken by signed mail ballots.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         77
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+          3.  MEMBERSHIP
+
+
+          3.1  General
+
+               Membership in the FST is a privilege, not a right.  An
+               invitation for voting membership may be extended to those
+               who the FST feels can contribute to the goals of the
+               Standard and the FST.  There are several classes of
+               participation in the efforts of the FST.  Membership in each
+               class has no specified term but continues from the time when
+               membership is initiated to the conclusion of the next formal
+               meeting.
+
+
+          3.2  Voting Members
+
+               3.2.1  Voting members are individuals who are elected into
+               such membership at the concluding session of a formal FST
+               meeting.  Any voting member who resigns between formal
+               meetings shall not be replaced until the membership
+               elections at the conclusion of the next formal meeting.  A
+               newly elected voting member gains voting rights only after
+               all voting members have been elected.  A significant
+               professional FORTH background is required of voting members.
+
+               3.2.2  Each voting member present at a formal meeting shall
+               indicate in writing his or her desire to continue as a
+               voting member.  Only these voting members can vote in a
+               general session of a formal meeting on any matters affecting
+               the Standard or the Charter and on the election of all
+               voting members.
+
+               3.2.3  Voting members are elected by a simple majority of
+               those voting members present.  The number of voting members
+               shall be limited to thirty (30).  Individuals eligible to be
+               elected are selected from each of the following ordered
+               categories in order, until the number of voting members
+               reaches the limit.
+
+                    3.2.3.1  Category 1:  current voting member who have
+                    actively participated in at least two days of a formal
+                    meeting.  Voting members are expected to actively
+                    participate in subteam meetings and all general
+                    sessions.
+
+                    3.2.3.2  Category 2:  current voting members who are
+                    not eligible by Category 1, but who have requested in
+                    writing that his or her voting membership be
+                    maintained.
+
+                    3.2.3.3  Category 3:  eligible candidates.  Eligible
+                    candidates will be presented to the voting members then
+                    elected as follows:
+
+
+
+                                         78
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+                         3.2.3.3.1  If the number of eligible candidates
+                         does not exceed the number of openings for voting
+                         membership, each candidate is voted upon and
+                         accepted by a simple majority.
+
+                         3.2.3.3.2  If the number of eligible candidates
+                         does exceed the number of openings for voting
+                         membership, candidates will be voted upon by
+                         ballot whereby each voting member may vote for up
+                         to the number of openings remaining.  Those
+                         candidates receiving the most votes will be
+                         elected until there are no more openings for
+                         voting membership.
+
+
+          3.3  Candidates
+
+               3.3.1  Candidates are individuals who desire to actively
+               participate in and support the FST by becoming voting
+               members.
+
+               3.3.2  To be eligible, each Candidate must:  declare in
+               writing to the secretary at the first general session of a
+               formal FST meeting that he or she is a Candidate, actively
+               participate in subteam meetings and all general sessions at
+               a formal FST meeting, and have a significant professional
+               background in FORTH.  The Chairperson may request
+               information or ask questions of any candidate to determine
+               his or her technical knowledge and experience.  Candidates
+               are expected to submit proposals, participate in the
+               discussions of the formal meeting, and contribute to the
+               work and voting of subteams.
+
+
+          3.4  Observers
+
+               3.4.1  Observers are individuals who attend a formal meeting
+               but are neither voting members nor candidates.  At the
+               discretion of the Chairperson, they may contribute to the
+               discussion at general sessions and to the work of subteams.
+               The number of observers allowed at a formal meeting may be
+               limited by the Chairperson.
+
+
+          3.5  FST Sponsors
+
+               3.5.1  FST sponsors are individuals or organizations who
+               contribute funds and other assistance to aid the work of the
+               FST.  FST sponsors have no duties or responsibilities in the
+               FST, but they will receive copies of proposals and comments
+               considered at a formal meeting, and drafts and adopted
+               standards prepared as a result of that meeting.
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         79
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+               3.5.3  FST sponsorship exists from the end of one formal
+               meeting to the end of the next formal meeting.
+
+               3.5.3  Qualification of FST sponsors may be determined by a
+               simple majority vote at a formal FST meeting.  If no such
+               qualification exist, the Chairperson may specify
+               qualifications, including the amount of financial
+               contributions, which will remain in effect until the next
+               formal FST meeting.
+
+
+          4.  OFFICERS
+
+
+          4.1  General
+
+               There shall be four types of elected officers of the FST:
+               the Chairperson, the Secretary, the Treasurer, and one or
+               more Referees.  Each officer shall be elected at a formal
+               meeting of the FST and serve until the next formal meeting.
+
+
+          4.2  Vacancies
+
+               If any office other than the Chairperson becomes vacant
+               between formal meetings, the Chairperson may appoint a
+               replacement.  If the office of the Chairperson becomes
+               vacant between formal meetings, a new Chairperson shall be
+               elected by an informal majority vote of the remaining
+               officers.  At any formal meeting, any officer, including the
+               Chairperson, may be replaced by a simple majority vote of
+               the voting members present at that meeting.
+
+
+          4.3  Chairperson
+
+               4.3.1  The Chairperson is responsible for governing the
+               general business of the FST.  He or she is responsible for
+               implementing the FST's Charter and any other requirements
+               specified by the Standard.
+
+               4.3.2  The Chairperson's term of office shall be from the
+               conclusion of the formal meeting at which he or she is
+               elected to the conclusion of the next formal meeting.  The
+               election of a Chairperson is held at the concluding general
+               session of a formal meeting after the election of voting
+               members; hence, newly elected voting members may vote for
+               the Chairperson.  Only voting members are eligible to be
+               elected Chairperson.
+
+               4.3.3  The Chairperson shall conduct each formal meeting.
+               In general, the meetings will follow the current Robert's
+               Rules of Order; however, the Chairperson may determine the
+               specific rules for a formal meeting.
+
+
+
+                                         80
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+               4.3.4  Any matter needing a decision between formal meetings
+               not specified by this Charter shall be decided by the
+               Chairperson.
+
+               4.3.5  The Chairperson has duties and responsibilities
+               specified elsewhere in this Charter.
+
+
+          4.4  Secretary
+
+               4.4.1  The Secretary is responsible for recording the
+               activities and results of the FST.
+
+               4.4.2  The Secretary is elected at the first general session
+               of a formal meeting and serves until a Secretary is elected
+               at the beginning of the next formal meeting.
+
+               4.4.3  The Secretary has many responsibilities.
+
+               4.4.3.1  The Secretary is responsible for collecting,
+               maintaining, and archiving the official copies of the
+               Standard, the Charter, all other FST documents,
+               correspondence, and lists of the FST members of each class.
+
+               4.4.3.2  During a formal meeting, the Secretary is
+               responsible for:
+
+                    (a)  Keeping the minutes of the general sessions,
+                    including all votes taken.  For votes affecting the
+                    Standard or Charter, he or she shall:  record the
+                    number of voting members present, determine if a quorum
+                    is present, determine the number of affirmative votes
+                    required for the vote to pass, the number of voting
+                    members voting in the affirmative and negative, and the
+                    result of the vote.
+
+                    (b)  Recording and verifying the attendance and
+                    membership class of each attendee.
+
+                    (c)  Recording the recommendations of subteams.
+
+               4.4.3.3  The Secretary is also responsible for collecting,
+               archiving, and distributing proposals before a formal
+               meeting.  He or she is also responsible for incorporating
+               proposals accepted during a formal meeting into the Standard
+               or Charter.  Other officers aid the Secretary in these
+               duties.
+
+          4.5  Treasurer
+
+               4.5.1  The Treasurer is responsible for managing the
+               financial business of the FST.  He or she is responsible for
+               maintaining accurate and current financial records and for
+               accepting and dispersing funds for official FST activities.
+
+
+
+                                         81
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+               4.5.2  The Treasurer's term of office shall be from the
+               conclusion of the formal meeting at which he or she is
+               elected to the conclusion of the next formal meeting.  The
+               election of a Treasurer is held just after the election of
+               the Chairperson.  Only voting members are eligible to be
+               elected Treasurer.
+
+
+          4.6  Referees
+
+               4.6.1  At the conclusion of a formal meeting there may be
+               additional technical work required to prepare a draft
+               Standard or Charter.  This work shall be performed by the
+               officers of the FST, including a group of Referees.  They
+               should be individuals who have superior knowledge and
+               experience in the implementation and use of FORTH.
+
+               4.6.2  At least three and no more than five Referees shall
+               be elected by a majority of the voting members present at
+               the concluding general sessions of a formal meeting.  This
+               takes place after the election of voting members.  A
+               Referee's term is from election at the end of one formal
+               meeting until the end of the next formal meeting.  Only
+               voting members are eligible to be elected as Referees.
+
+               4.6.3  The Referees shall adopt methods and rules as they
+               deem appropriate to complete their work; they may be
+               informal.  However, any matter committed to the Referees for
+               resolution must achieve near unanimous agreement (not more
+               than one no vote).  Lacking that, the matter shall be
+               omitted from further action pending further consideration at
+               the next formal meeting.
+
+
+          5.  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+
+          5.1  General
+
+               5.1.1  Since FORTH is an extensible language and subject to
+               evolution, the Standard may contain a section describing
+               experimental proposal to aid in the analysis of and the
+               decision for or against future adoption into the Standard.
+               After the results of experimentation are known, each
+               proposal will be considered, at a future formal meeting, for
+               inclusion into the Standard.
+
+               5.1.2  An experimental proposal may be individual FORTH
+               words, sets of related words, or specifications for part of
+               the Standard.  Experimental proposals may be derived from
+               ordinary proposals or other contributions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         82
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+          5.2  Required Information
+
+               Each experimental proposal must contain the following
+               minimum information:
+
+               5.2.1  A description of the proposal including an overview
+               of its functions and its interactions with existing FORTH
+               words.
+
+               5.2.2  A glossary entry of each word in the form and
+               notation of the Standard.
+
+               5.2.3  A statement by the author(s) indicating why the
+               proposal meets inclusion into the Standard.  Both advantages
+               and disadvantages should be discussed.
+
+
+          5.3  Suggested Information
+
+               It is suggested that each experimental proposal also
+               include:
+
+               5.3.1  A source definition for each word in the proposal.
+               High level definitions using Standard words are preferred,
+               but new primitive words may be defined in an assembly
+               language of one commonly-known processor.  Sufficient
+               documentation should be provided so that implementation on
+               other processors is direct.
+
+               5.3.2  An example showing usage of the new words.
+
+
+          6.  VOTING
+
+
+          6.1  General
+
+               Only voting members have the right to vote on proposals
+               affecting the Standard, a draft Standard, or this Charter.
+
+
+          6.2  Advisory Votes
+
+               At the discretion of the Chairperson, advisory votes may be
+               requested at a formal meeting.  At the discretion of the
+               Chairperson, all attendees may participate in an advisory
+               vote.
+
+
+          6.3  Method
+
+               Any vote at a formal meeting may be by show of hands or, at
+               the discretion of the Chairperson, by an informal secret
+               paper ballot or a roll call.
+
+
+
+                                         83
+
+
+
+
+
+          D.  CHARTER
+
+
+          6.4  Number
+
+               A vote to adopt a proposal into the draft Standard or to
+               change the Standard, except for the Experimental Proposals
+               section of the Standard requires a two-thirds affirmative
+               vote of the voting members present at a general session of a
+               formal meeting, provided that the number of votes cast are
+               at least two thirds of that morning's quorum count.  To
+               adopt an experimental proposal into the Experimental
+               Proposals section of the draft Standard or to change this
+               Charter, an affirmative vote of a simple majority is
+               required.  Accepting any other procedural matter at a formal
+               meeting requires only a simple majority affirmative vote.
+
+
+          6.5  Proxies
+
+               All votes must be cast by the particular voting member
+               eligible to vote.  No proxy voting is allowed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         84
+
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83-e.txt b/doc/fst83/fst83-e.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6b680f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83-e.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,331 @@
+
+
+
+
+          E.  PROPOSAL/COMMENT FORM
+
+
+
+
+                         APPENDIX E.  PROPOSAL/COMMENT FORM
+
+
+          The following pages are the proposal and/or comment submittal
+          form.  The form includes instructions which should be
+          explanatory.  Copies of submitted proposals and comments will be
+          made available to FORTH Standards Team members and to team
+          sponsors.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         85
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                       FST Proposal and Comment Submittal Form
+          -----------------------------------------------------------------
+          FST USER  Title:                             Proposal Number:
+           ONLY --> Related Proposals:                 Disposition:
+          =================================================================
+          Keyword(s):                                       Category:
+                                              ( ) Proposal  or  ( ) Comment
+          FORTH Word(s):                      Section #(s):
+          -----------------------------------------------------------------
+          Abstract:
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          -----------------------------------------------------------------
+          Proposal and Discussion:
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          ----------------------------------------------------------------
+          Submitted by:                                      Date:
+                                                             Page    of
+          =================================================================
+          FORTH Standards Team; PO Box 4545; Mountain View, CA 94040 820801
+
+
+
+                                          86
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+          
+
+                  Proposal and Comment Submittal Form Instructions
+
+          Please use the supplied forms for your entire proposal.  The
+          continuation form is only to be used if absolutely necessary; try
+          to get your proposal to fit on the first sheet.  If it helps, use
+          a reducing copy machine to get more material onto the first
+          sheet.  If you must use multiple sheets, put the main idea onto
+          the first sheet and less important material onto continuation
+          sheets.  Remember that material on continuation sheets may be
+          overlooked.
+
+          The proposal forms have been produced on a computer system so
+          that you may produce your proposals using your own computer
+          system.  If you print your proposal and form on your computer
+          system, all of the information shown on the form(s) MUST be
+          printed and in the same location.
+
+          The following are the instructions for each of the areas of the
+          form:
+
+          1.   Please think of the most appropriate keyword or keywords
+               describing your proposal.
+
+          2.   Select the best of the following categories of proposals:
+               0    Nucleus Layer other than #1 (i.e., +  AND )
+               1    Memory Operations (i.e., @  CMOVE )
+               2    Dictionary (i.e., '  FORGET )
+               3    String Operations (i.e., WORD  COUNT )
+               4    Interpreter Layer other than #2 or #3 (i.e., ABORT  . )
+               5    Compiler Layer (i.e., :  DO )
+               6    Device Layer (i.e., BLOCK  TYPE )
+               7    Experimental (i.e., 32-bit stack entries)
+               8    Other Technical (i.e., mono-addressing)
+               9    Charter
+
+          3.   Mark whether this is a PROPOSAL or a COMMENT.
+
+          4.   Indicate which FORTH word or words are relevant.
+
+          5.   Indicate which section or sections of the Standard are
+               relevant.
+
+          6.   The abstract must be kept short.  The title, keywords,
+               category, and abstract may be used in a database for
+               organization and display on a terminal during a Standards
+               Team meeting.
+
+          7.   Detail your proposal and provide supporting discussion.
+
+          8.   Indicate the name of the submitter or the names of the
+               submitters.
+
+
+
+
+                                          87
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+          9.   Finally, date the submittal and number each page.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                          88
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                FST Proposal and Comment Submittal Continuation Form
+          -----------------------------------------------------------------
+          FST USE ONLY -->                             Proposal Number:
+          =================================================================
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          
+          -----------------------------------------------------------------
+          Submitted by:                                Date:
+                                                             Page   of
+          =================================================================
+          FORTH Standards Team; PO Box 4545; Mountain View, CA 94040 820801
+
+
+
+                                          89
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83_12.fs b/doc/fst83/fst83_12.fs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67af4e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83_12.fs
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+( -*- forth -*- )
+
+checking ================= REQUIRED WORD SET ====================
+
+checking Nucleus layer
+checks: ! *
+
+checks:  !  *  */  */MOD  +  +!  -  /  /MOD  0<  0=  0>  1+  1-  2+
+checks:  2-  2/  <  =  >  >R  ?DUP  @  ABS  AND  C!  C@  CMOVE
+checks:  CMOVE>  COUNT  D+  D<  DEPTH  DNEGATE  DROP  DUP  EXECUTE
+checks:  EXIT  FILL  I  J  MAX  MIN  MOD  NEGATE  NOT  OR  OVER  PICK
+checks:  R>  R@  ROLL  ROT  SWAP  U<  UM*  UM/MOD  XOR
+
+checking Device layer
+
+checks:  BLOCK  BUFFER  CR  EMIT  EXPECT  FLUSH  KEY  SAVE-BUFFERS
+checks:  SPACE  SPACES  TYPE  UPDATE
+
+
+checking Interpreter layer
+
+checks:  #  #>  #S  #TIB  '  (  -TRAILING  .  .(  <#  >BODY  >IN
+checks:  ABORT  BASE  BLK  CONVERT  DECIMAL  DEFINITIONS  FIND
+checks:  FORGET  FORTH  FORTH-83  HERE  HOLD  LOAD  PAD  QUIT  SIGN
+checks:  SPAN  TIB  U.  WORD
+
+
+checking  Compiler layer
+
+checks:   +LOOP  ,  ."  :  ;  ABORT"  ALLOT  BEGIN  COMPILE  CONSTANT
+checks:   CREATE  DO  DOES>  ELSE  IF  IMMEDIATE  LEAVE  LITERAL  LOOP
+checks:   REPEAT  STATE  THEN  UNTIL  VARIABLE  VOCABULARY  WHILE  [
+checks:   [']  [COMPILE]  ]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         44
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83_13.fs b/doc/fst83/fst83_13.fs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db90067
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83_13.fs
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+checking ============== The Double Number Extension Word Set Layers
+
+checking Nucleus layer
+
+checks:  2!  2@  2DROP  2DUP  2OVER  2ROT  2SWAP  D+  D-  D0=  D2/
+checks:  D<  D=  DABS  DMAX  DMIN  DNEGATE  DU<
+
+checking Interpreter layer
+
+checks:  D.  D.R
+
+checking Compiler layer
+
+checks:  2CONSTANT  2VARIABLE
+
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83_14.fs b/doc/fst83/fst83_14.fs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36132f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83_14.fs
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+checking =============== The Assembler Extension Word Set Layers
+
+checking Interpreter layer
+
+checks:  ASSEMBLER
+
+
+checking  Compiler layer
+
+checks:  ;CODE  CODE  END-CODE
+
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83_15.fs b/doc/fst83/fst83_15.fs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa5bcaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83_15.fs
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+
+checking ================== The System Extension Word Set Layers
+
+checking Nucleus layer
+
+checks:  BRANCH  ?BRANCH
+
+
+checking Interpreter layer
+
+checks:  CONTEXT  CURRENT
+
+
+checking Compiler layer
+
+checks:  <MARK  <RESOLVE  >MARK  >RESOLVE
+
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83_16.fs b/doc/fst83/fst83_16.fs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d24905
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83_16.fs
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+
+
+
+checking =================  CONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+checks:  -->  .R  2*  BL  BLANK  C,  DUMP  EDITOR  EMPTY-BUFFERS
+checks:  END  ERASE  HEX  INTERPRET  K  LIST OCTAL  OFFSET QUERY
+checks:  RECURSE  SCR  SP@  THRU  U.R
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83_b.fs b/doc/fst83/fst83_b.fs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74883d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83_b.fs
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+
+
+
+checking  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+(  No recommendation is made that these words be included in a system. )
+
+(         No restrictions are placed on the definition or usage of        )
+(         uncontrolled words.  However, use of these names for procedures )
+(         differing from the given definitions is discouraged.            )
+
+checks:  !BITS  **  +BLOCK  -'  -MATCH  -TEXT  /LOOP  1+!  1-!  ;:  ;S
+checks:  <> <BUILDS  <CMOVE  ><  >MOVE<  @BITS  AGAIN  ASCII  ASHIFT  B/BUF
+checks:  BELL  CHAIN  CONTINUED  CUR  DBLOCK  DPL  FLD  H.  I'  
+checks:  IFEND  IFTRUE  INDEX  LAST  LINE  LINELOAD  LOADS  MAP0
+checks:  MASK  MOVE  MS  NAND  NOR  NUMBER  O.  OTHERWISE  PAGE  READ-MAP
+checks:  REMEMBER  REWIND  ROTATE  S0  SET  SHIFT  TEXT  USER  WORDS
+checks:  \LOOP
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83_c.fs b/doc/fst83/fst83_c.fs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e874efd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83_c.fs
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+checking =====================  EXPERIMENTAL PROPOSALS
+
+checking SEARCH ORDER SPECIFICATION AND CONTROL
+
+checks:  ONLY  FORTH  ALSO  ORDER  WORDS   FORGET  DEFINITIONS SEAL
+
+checking DEFINITION FIELD ADDRESS CONVERSION OPERATORS
+
+checks:  >BODY  >NAME  >LINK  BODY>  NAME>  LINK> N>LINK L>NAME
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/fst83chk.fs b/doc/fst83/fst83chk.fs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d50db52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/fst83chk.fs
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+( -*- forth -*- )
+
+: checking ( [text<:>] -- )
+    [char] : parse ." /////// " type cr
+;
+
+: checks: ( [text< >].. -- )
+	8 spaces
+	begin
+		bl word 
+		dup dup if c@ then 
+	while
+		dup count type space
+		dup find if 2drop
+		else cr ." missing " count type cr 8 spaces
+		then
+	repeat
+        cr
+	drop
+;
+
+include fst83_12.fs
+include fst83_13.fs
+include fst83_14.fs
+include fst83_15.fs
+include fst83_16.fs
+include fst83_b.fs
+include fst83_c.fs
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/doc/fst83/s.txt b/doc/fst83/s.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9204be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fst83/s.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,462 @@
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+
+
+                      APPENDIX B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          The Uncontrolled Reference Word Set contains glossary definitions
+          which are included for public reference of words that have past
+          or present usage and/or are candidates for future
+          standardization.  No recommendation is made that these words be
+          included in a system.
+
+          No restrictions are placed on the definition or usage of
+          uncontrolled words.  However, use of these names for procedures
+          differing from the given definitions is discouraged.
+
+          !BITS        16b1 addr 16b2 --                      "store-bits"
+               Store the value of 16b1 masked by 16b2 into the equivalent
+               masked part of the contents of addr, without affecting bits
+               outside the mask.
+
+          **           n1 n2 -- n3                                 "power"
+               n3 is the value of n1 to the power n2.
+
+          +BLOCK       w -- u                                 "plus-block"
+               u is the sum of w plus the number of the block being
+               interpreted.
+
+          -'           -- addr false                           "dash-tick"
+                       -- true                       
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       -' <name>                     
+               Leave the parameter field of <name> beneath zero (false) if
+               <name> can be found in the search order; leave only true if
+               not found.
+
+          -MATCH       addr1 +n1 addr2 +n2 -- addr3 flag      "dash-match"
+               Attempt to find the +n2-length text string beginning at
+               addr2 somewhere in the +n1-length text string beginning at
+               addr1.  Return the last+1 address addr3 of the match point
+               and a flag which is zero if a match exists.
+
+          -TEXT        addr1 +n1 addr2 -- n2                   "dash-text"
+               Compare two strings over the length +n1 beginning at addr1
+               and addr2.  Return zero if the strings are equal.  If
+               unequal, return n2, the difference between the last
+               characters compared:  addr1(i) - addr2(i).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         58
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          /LOOP        +n --                         C,I         "up-loop"
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               A do-loop terminating word.  The loop index is incremented
+               by the positive value +n.  If the unsigned magnitude of the
+               resultant index is greater than the limit, then the loop is
+               terminated, otherwise execution returns to the corresponding
+               DO .  The comparison is unsigned magnitude.  sys is balanced
+               with its corresponding DO .  See:  DO
+
+          1+!          addr --                            "one-plus-store"
+               Add one to the 16-bit contents at addr.
+
+          1-!          addr --                           "one-minus-store"
+               Subtract one from the 16-bit contents at addr.
+
+          ;:           -- addr                       C,I"semi-colon-colon"
+               Used to specify a new defining word:  
+                       : <namex> <name>              
+               When <namex> is executed, it creates an entry for the new
+               word <name>.  Later execution of <name> will execute the
+               sequence of words between ;: and ; , with the address of the
+               first (if any) parameters associated with <name> on the
+               stack.
+
+          ;S           --                            Interpret only"semi-s"
+               Stop interpretation of a block.
+
+          <>           w1 w2 -- flag                           "not-equal"
+               flag is true if w1 is not equal to w2.
+
+          <BUILDS      --                                         "builds"
+               Used in conjunction with DOES> in defining words, in the
+               form:   
+                       : <namex> ... <BUILDS ... DOES> ... ;              
+               and then:                             
+                       <namex> <name>                
+               
+               When <namex> executes, <BUILDS creates a dictionary entry
+               for the new <name>.  The sequence of words between <BUILDS
+               and DOES> established a parameter field for <name>.  When
+               <name> is later executed, the sequence of words following
+               DOES> will be executed, with the parameter field address of
+               <name> on the data stack.
+
+          <CMOVE       addr1 addr2 u --                   "reverse-c-move"
+               A synonym for CMOVE> .
+
+          ><           16b1 -- 16b2                            "byte-swap"
+               Swap the high and low bytes within 16b1.
+
+          >MOVE<       addr1 addr2 u --                   "byte-swap-move"
+               Move u bytes beginning at addr1 to the memory beginning at
+               addr2.  During this move, the order of each byte pair is
+               reversed.
+
+
+
+                                         59
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          @BITS        addr 16b1 -- 16b2                      "fetch-bits"
+               Return the 16-bits at addr masked by 16b1.
+
+          AGAIN        --                            C,I                  
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               Effect an unconditional jump back to the start of a BEGIN-
+               AGAIN loop.  sys is balanced with its corresponding BEGIN .
+               See:  BEGIN
+
+          ASCII        -- char                       I,M          "as-key"
+                       --                            (compiling)          
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       ASCII ccc                     
+               where the delimiter of ccc is a space.  char is the ASCII
+               character value of the first character in ccc.  If
+               interpreting, char is left on the stack.  If compiling,
+               compile char as a literal so that when the colon definition
+               is later executed, char is left on the stack.
+
+          ASHIFT       16b1 n -- 16b2                            "a-shift"
+               Shift the value 16b1 arithmetically n bits left if n is
+               positive, shifting zeros into the least significant bit
+               positions.  If n is negative, 16b1 is shifted right; the
+               sign is included in the shift and remains unchanged.
+
+          B/BUF        -- 1024                          "bytes-per-buffer"
+               A constant leaving 1024, the number of bytes per block
+               buffer.
+
+          BELL         --                            
+               Activate a terminal bell or noise-maker as appropriate to
+               the device in use.
+
+          CHAIN        --                            M                    
+               Used in the form:                     
+                       CHAIN <name>                  
+               Connect the CURRENT vocabulary to all definitions that might
+               be entered into the vocabulary <name> in the future.  The
+               CURRENT vocabulary may not be FORTH or ASSEMBLER .  Any
+               given vocabulary may only be chained once, but may be the
+               object of any number of chainings.  For example, every user-
+               defined vocabulary may include the sequence:               
+                       CHAIN FORTH
+
+          CONTINUED    u --                          M                    
+               Continue interpretation at block u.
+
+          CUR          -- addr                       
+               A variable pointing to the physical record number before
+               which the tape is currently positioned.  REWIND sets CUR=1.
+
+          DBLOCK       ud -- addr                    M           "d-block"
+               Identical to BLOCK but with a 32-bit block unsigned number.
+
+
+
+
+                                         60
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          DPL          -- addr                       U             "d-p-l"
+               A variable containing the number of places after the
+               fractional point for input conversion.
+
+          FLD          -- addr                       U             "f-l-d"
+               A variable pointing to the field length reserved for a
+               number during output conversion.
+
+          H.           u --                          M             "h-dot"
+               Output u as a hexadecimal integer with one trailing blank.
+               The current base is unchanged.
+
+          I'           -- w                          C           "i-prime"
+               Used within a colon definition executed only from within a
+               do-loop to return the corresponding loop index.
+
+          IFEND                                      Interpret only"if-end"
+               Terminate a conditional interpretation sequence begun by
+               IFTRUE .
+
+          IFTRUE       flag --                    Interpret only "if-true"
+               Begin an:                             
+                       IFTRUE ... OTHERWISE ... IFEND                     
+               conditional sequence.  These conditional words operated
+               like:   
+                       IF ... ELSE ... THEN          
+               except that they cannot be nested, and are to be used only
+               during interpretation.  In conjunction with the words [ and
+               ] the words [ and ] they may be used within a colon
+               definition to control compilation, although they are not to
+               be compiled.
+
+          INDEX        u1 u2 --                      M                    
+               Print the first line of each screen over the range {u1..u2}.
+               This displays the first line of each screen of source text,
+               which conventionally contains a title.
+
+          LAST         -- addr                       U                    
+               A variable containing the address of the beginning of the
+               last dictionary entry made, which may not yet be a complete
+               or valid entry.
+
+          LINE         +n -- addr                    M                    
+               addr is the address of the beginning of line +n for the
+               screen whose number is contained in SCR .  The range of +n
+               is {0..15}.
+
+          LINELOAD     +n u --                                 "line-load"
+               Begin interpretation at line +n of screen u.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         61
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          LOADS        u --                          M                    
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       u LOADS <name>                
+               When <name> is subsequently executed, block u will be
+               loaded.
+
+          MAP0         -- addr                                  "map-zero"
+               A variable pointing to the first location in the tape map.
+
+          MASK         n -- 16b                      
+               16b is a mask of n most-significant bits if n is positive,
+               or n least-significant bits if n is negative.
+
+          MOVE         addr1 addr2 u --              
+               The u bytes at address addr1 are moved to address addr2.
+               The data are moved such that the u bytes remaining at
+               address addr2 are the same data as was originally at address
+               addr1.  If u is zero nothing is moved.
+
+          MS           +n --                         M               "m-s"
+               Delay for approximately +n milliseconds.
+
+          NAND         16b1 16b2 -- 16b3             
+               16b3 is the one's complement of the logical AND of 16b1 with
+               16b2.
+
+          NOR          16b1 16b2 -- 16b3             
+               16b3 is the one's complement of the logical OR of 16b1 with
+               16b2.
+
+          NUMBER       addr -- d                     
+               Convert the count and character string at addr, to a signed
+               32-bit integer, using the value of BASE .  If numeric
+               conversion is not possible, an error condition exists.  The
+               string may contain a preceding minus sign.
+
+          O.           u --                          M             "o-dot"
+               Print u in octal format with one trailing blank.  The value
+               in BASE is unaffected.
+
+          OTHERWISE    --                            Interpret only       
+               An interpreter-level conditional word.  See:  IFTRUE
+
+          PAGE         --                            M                    
+               Clear the terminal screen or perform a form-feed action
+               suitable to the output device currently active.
+
+          READ-MAP     --                            M          "read-map"
+               Read to the next file mark on tape constructing a
+               correspondence table in memory (the map) relating physical
+               block position to logical block number.  The tape should
+               normally be rewound to its load point before executing READ-
+               MAP .
+
+
+
+
+                                         62
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          REMEMBER     --                            M                    
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       REMEMBER <name>               
+               Defines a word which, when executed, will cause <name> and
+               all subsequently defined words to be deleted from the
+               dictionary.  <name> may be compiled into and executed from a
+               colon definition.  The sequence       
+                       DISCARD REMEMBER DISCARD      
+               provides a standardized preface to any group of transient
+               word definitions.
+
+          REWIND       --                            M                    
+               Rewind the tape to its load point, setting CUR equal to one.
+
+          ROTATE       16b1 n -- 16b2                
+               Rotate 16b1 left n bits if n is positive, right n bits if n
+               is negative.  Bits shifted out of one end of the cell are
+               shifted back in at the opposite end.
+
+          S0           -- addr                       U            "s-zero"
+               A variable containing the address of the bottom of the
+               stack.
+
+          SET          16b addr --                   M                    
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       16b addr SET <name>           
+               Defines a word <name> which, when executed, will cause the
+               value 16b to be stored at addr.
+
+          SHIFT        16b1 n -- 16b2                
+               Logical shift 16b1 left n bits if n is positive, right n
+               bits if n is negative.  Zeros are shifted into vacated bit
+               positions.
+
+          TEXT         char --                       M                    
+               Accept characters from the input stream, as for WORD , into
+               PAD , blank-filling the remainder of PAD to 84 characters.
+
+          USER         +n --                         M                    
+               A defining word executed in the form: 
+                       +n USER <name>                
+               which creates a user variable <name>.  +n is the offset
+               within the user area where the value for <name> is stored.
+               Execution of <name> leaves its absolute user area storage
+               address.
+
+          WORDS        --                            M                    
+               List the word names in the first vocabulary of the currently
+               active search order.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         63
+
+
+
+
+
+          B.  UNCONTROLLED REFERENCE WORDS
+
+
+          \LOOP        +n --                         C,I       "down-loop"
+                       sys --   (compiling)          
+               A do-loop terminating word.  The loop index is decremented
+               by the positive value +n.  If the unsigned magnitude of the
+               resultant index is less than or equal to the limit, then the
+               loop is terminated, otherwise execution returns to the
+               corresponding DO .  The comparison is unsigned.  sys is
+               balanced with its corresponding DO .  See:  DO
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                         64
+